Home

4Motion Device Driver User Manual

1. Bandwidth MHz Total Uplink Duration slots DL UL Ratio 5 10 4 35 12 5 32 15 6 29 18 7 26 21 7 MHz 3 24 9 4 21 12 5 18 15 3 8 2 1 3 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab The Air Frame Structure Zones tab enables configuration of the map zone parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS H D ia 255 243 41 1 1 2 General Air Frame Rructure General Ar Frame Structure Zones Mobity First Zone Sub Burst Mode Menm Sze Noumeation Ju symbols Hamm Sub Burst Mode Ewa xy Mann stn laun Minimum Map Soe Notimkation yw dee Msp Major Groups mo t gi Ss Basie Map Repetition 1 e Frame Structure Mode D Diversity Mode Matrix AB Neighbor Beam Foring No lv Sound shit Used c RCID Usage sable EI Downlink Osta Zone Permutation Base D p Bask Rate for Management Joes bel Dock Rte for uta eg I Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base D KE Uplink Data Zane Permutation Base D k Ser Rate ae Ha Lo Betresn w m Dore J Figure 3 44 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab The Air Frame Structure Zones tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description First Zone Minimum Size The initial size in symbols of the first zone When reuse 3 is used within first zone this parameter should be equal across all BSs within deployment
2. Parameter Description Unit Number Read only The Power Feeder Unit Number 1 4 Port Number Read only The Power Feeder Port Number 1 4 AU Slot Number The Slot Number of the AU to which the Power Feeder Port is connected 1 4 7 9 or None The default is None AU Port Number The AU Port Number to which the Power Feeder Port is connected 1 4 or None The default is None In addition the page includes the following buttons Button Description Add Power Feeder Adds a new Power Feeder to the table Up to 4 Power Feeders may be configured Each Power Feeder includes 4 entries for Port Number 1 to 4 Note that each combination of AU Slot Number and AU Port Number cannot appear in more than one entry excluding combinations with None value 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Sei D res Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Button Description Delete Deletes the selected Power Feeder from the table You must select all 4 entries of a Power Feeder to delete it 3 6 2 5 Antenna Page The Antenna page is applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS The Antenna page enables defining the properties of the site s antennas The Antenna page comprises two sections The Antennas List and the Antennas Parameter Editor section edu Type Antenna Parameters SS Wee Antenna Product Type defaul
3. Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Changed to The current value of the VLAN ID assigned to the relevant interface 3 5 1 2 L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Micro Outdoor BTS J H L1 L2 Connectivity Data amp OC Port Operational State Administrative Stake Negotiston Auto EI Port Speed v Mbps Duplex Mode aoe gt Betresn e Ai Figure 3 8 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Micro Outdoor BTS The L1 L2 Connectivity page of the Micro Outdoor BTS includes the following parameters of the Data amp DC Ethernet port Parameter Description Operational State Read only The operational status of the Ethernet port Unlock Up or Lock Down Administrative State Read only not configurable The administrative status of the port Unlock Up or Lock Down Negotiation The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual The default is Auto Port Speed The port speed to be used for the physical interface Configurable only if Negotiation mode is Manual The available options are 10 100 and 1000 Mbps The default is 1000 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D O Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Duplex Mode The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Dupl
4. Neighbor CINR Handover Handover The CINR at the Neighbor BS is above the request gt dB Request Trigger threshold in dB Neighbor RSSI Handover Handover The RSSI at the Neighbor BS is above the request gt dBm Request Trigger threshold in dBm Neighbor CINR Own CINR Handover Handover The CINR at the Neighbor BS minus the request gt dB Request CINR at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Neighbor RSSI Own RSSI Handover Handover The RSSI at the Neighbor BS minus the request gt dBm Request RSSI at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm Distance Handover request m Handover The Serving BS distance from the MS Request calculated by measuring the round trip delay is above the Trigger threshold in meter Own CINR Handover request lt dB Handover The CINR at the Serving BS is below the Request Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI Handover request lt dBm Handover The RSSI at the Serving BS is below the Request Trigger threshold in dBm Radio Advanced Page The Radio Advanced page comprises the following tabs Ranging Tab Feedback Allocations Tab Power Control Tab Management Tab QoS Tab 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Beam Forming Tab applicable only for Macro BTS Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 2 1 Ranging Tab Ranging Feedback Alocations L Power Control eam Forming Management Leg Mode Creste Update COe
5. Select one or several entries and right click to view the following file management options 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se D Chapter 9 The File Manager The File Manager Parameter Description Restore Applicable only if one configuration file current or older is selected Opens the Restore Task Editor for the selected configuration backup file enabling to restore the configuration See Restore Configuration Task on page 295 The Restore Task Editor can also be opened by double clicking on the selected configuration file s entry Delete Deletes the selected file s from the database Export Exports the selected file s to the client file system Click to open the Save window browse to the desired location on the client file system and click Save to export the file s Import Imports a configuration backup file from the client file system Click to open the Import Config Backup File window browse to the location on the client file system where the file is stored select the file and click Import NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Mass Configuration Available only for configuration backup files Opens the Mass Configuration Wizard for creating Offline Configuration Files see The Mass Configuration Wizard on page 251 based on the selected file Export
6. Gabriel_ 77 4M Mac 1010 1 mpu_3_ mpu_3_ Operati Gleis e E Figure 8 6 Software Upgrade Task Editor BTS Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade Task Editor includes the following general parameters Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 printable characters Software Download Activity The type of upgrade BTS Software Upgrade or AU Software Upgrade AU Software Upgrade is applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The content of the Software Upgrade Settings and Select Equipment sections depend on the selected Software Download Activity 8 4 2 BTS Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade Settings section comprises the following action options when BTS Software Upgrade is selected as the Software Download Activity 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Parameter Description Download to Shadow Loads the upgrade file selected in the File Name selection field below to the Shadow memory of the applicable device s Reboot from Shadow Perform reset and boot from the Shadow file Set as Operational Version Applicable only for devices running from the Shadow file Sets the running file as the new Operational file The previous Operational Main file will now become the new Shadow file File Name Available only if the Download to Shadow option is selected If the de
7. Parameter Description Type The type of trigger Value The threshold value for the Trigger Action The action to be triggered when the relevant values goes above below the threshold The available options depend on the selected Type Neighbor The neighbor s for whom the rule defined by the previous parameters is applicable General for all neighbors or specific neighbor s from the Neighbor List The specific neighbor s option is applicable only for certain triggers with Handover Action Neighbor CINR gt Neighbor CINR Own CINR gt Neighbor RSSI gt Neighbor RSSI Own RSSI gt The Triggers table also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Trigger Adds a new entry to the Triggers table Delete Trigger Deletes one or several selected entries from the Triggers table The Type Action and Neighbor of an existing Trigger entry cannot be modified In existing Triggers entries only the Value can be modified The following table provides description possible Actions and value range for each Trigger Type 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Handover Request is below the Trigger threshold in dBm Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Trigger Type Possible Actions Trigger Condition Possible Values Own CINR lt Scan Request The CINR at the Serving BS 64 to 63 5 in is below the Trigger steps of 0 5 Handover Request SE threshold i
8. column next to the Counter s name to identify the required value scale The values displayed for this counter on the graph are the actual counter values multiplied by the scale factor 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Cd Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Graph and Graph Controls Section 7 4 The Graph and Graph Controls Section The graph and graph control section contains the graphs area used for displaying the selected counters values over time and several graph controls on the right side of the window By default the starting time of the graphs is the time at which the first counter was selected The resolution of the time axis will change dynamically to allow display of graphs from starting time to current time If the Show Legend option is selected the default the color and name of each selected counter is displayed below the graph area Deselect to hide the legends Select the Positive Only check box to set the boundaries of the values vertical axis between 0 and 100 Deselect the default to set the boundaries between 100 to 100 You can use the lt and gt buttons to shift the time axis to the left right Left click and move the mouse to the right while holding the left button down to mark a selected time interval After releasing the mouse s left button the selected interval will be displayed using the entire width of the graph section zoom in You can repeat the process an
9. Managing a Single Device L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Most parameters of Backhaul Cascade and Management Ports are configurable Added External VLAN ID in Management Port Updated configuration rules for Bearer VLAN ID in Backhaul Port September 2011 Managing a Single Device R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab New parameter Legacy ASN GW Mode September 2011 Configuring Templates The BS Template Radio Basic Page General Def Tab New parameter Legacy ASN GW Mode September 2011 Configuration History New Feature September 2011 Section 2 2 Duplicate Site Manager Removed replaced by Offline Configuration September 2011 Tool Configuring Templates Managing Tables in Update Mode Section 5 1 2 2 Improved description September 2011 Managing a Single Device AU Page Updated description of Shutdown Operation for September 2011 AU Control Tab Micro BTS Software Upgrade Task NPU Software Upgrade changed to BTS September 2011 Software Upgrade Multiple Configuration Task Removed moved to Infrastructure Manual September 2011 The Performance Monitoring Viewer Modified General Controls section September 2011 Added details on supported counters Mass Configuration Wizard Changed name was previously Offline September 2011 Configuration Tool Updated functionality initiated from File Manager File Manager Corrected the na
10. npulplflp External mgmt The Source IP Address of the External Management Interface Must be unique in the managed network npulplfMask External mgmt The IP subnet mask of the External Management Interface npulpRouteNextHop External mgmt The Next Hop Default Gateway for the External Management interface For Macro BTS this is a virtual parameter not included in the configuration file For Micro BTS this is cnctExtMgmtDfltGwip Must be in the same subnet as npulplflp External mgmt This parameter affects automatic management by the management system of IP routes as described in Section 6 3 4 8 below npuExtMgmtVlanid The VLAN ID of external management traffic 6 3 4 3 BS Parameters BS parameters should be repeated per BS BS parameters are not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW After the last BS it is mandatory to have a separation line Parameter Name in File Description bsldLsb BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS in decimal format Must be unique in the radio access network A number in the range from 1 to 16 777 215 a 24 bit value that in the management system is represented as A B C where A B C are from 0 to 255 You may calculate BS ID LSB based on ServiceZone CellSiteld Sectorld optional parameters using the following formula BS ID LSB SectorlID CellSiteld 256 ServiceZone 32 256 See more details in BS ID Structure Section 6 3 3 Serv
11. 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Page Parameter Description Longitude The longitude of the site The format is Ill mmm a Is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Latitude The latitude of the site The format is Il mmm a His latitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is N north or S south Altitude The altitude in meters of the site The Altitude is in meters from 300 0 to 9000 0 The Location parameters are configurable in the GPS page see Location on page 82 for devices with GPS Type set to None Otherwise the values are calculated by the GPS receiver 3 4 2 Site Dry Contact Tab The Dry Contact tab is applicable only for Macro Indoor BTSs The Dry Contact tab enables defining the use of input and output alarms dl ez Site General Dry Contact Input Alarm Input Number Nee Seed Alem Blocking 1 Extena Equpmerk Gose H External Equpmert Clase no 3 External Cqupmert Close no k Externa Equiprert Gose w Extena Equpmert Close ro e External Cqupmert Jose pe 7 Extena Equipmert Ce w External Equpmert Close ro Output Sne Output Number Name U Sate 1 off 4 off 3 ot Ho Lo Batres ent Dore Figure 3 6 Site Page Dry Content Tab The Dry Contact
12. Contents 5 3 4 Default le E 237 5 4 Management Template seet ee eege 238 54 1 SNMP M nagers E 238 EN e dei 241 5 4 3 Logging Page not applicable for Micro BTS 242 5 5 Equ ipment Temple Ze g ege Ge ed esiisa eap annere dene irea EE Era NaN NH 245 5 5 1 NPU System Management Tab Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS 245 5 5 2 AU Control Tab Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS ek 247 5 5 3 AU Control Tab Micro Outdoor BUS s sssssssssusnnrsunnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 248 5 5 4 Shutdown Power AU to ODU TaD icisiississcecsccisncsuiossactvercasieasnstsernaeadieasneaiavenens 249 Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard ue NEEN 251 Get MPEG CE eege 252 6 2 Golden Site Configuration Backup File REENEN REENEN ENNEN ENEE 253 Er RN TE 254 6 3 1 Excel Worksheet Structure eessen deed 254 6 3 2 Automatic Mode for Calculating BS Parametere AANEREN 254 0 3 3 CHE EE dea le 255 6 3 4 Parameters and Configuration Rules cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenseeeseaeees 255 63 97 TEE 264 6 4 Using the Mass Configuration Wizard ccceeeeneeeeee eee eeeeeeeeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneneeees 267 6 4 1 Starting the Mass Configuration Wzard ANNE 267 6 4 2 Mass Configuration Wizard COMMON Parameters EE 267 6 4 3 Mass Configuration Wizard Import Unique Parameters File 267 6 4 4 Mass Configuration Wizard Merge Pie 268 6 4 5 Mass Configuration Wizard Gummary EEN 268 Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer NEE
13. HM Maintenance Connectivity 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D e 3 6 1 3 2 1 1 3 6 1 3 2 1 2 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Required and Installed Equipment The Required section enables viewing editing the required properties of the AU module that should be installed in the slot Parameter Description Type The required AU type In a Macro Indoor BTS only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable In a Macro Outdoor BTS the applicable options are AU 4x4 Modem for a 4 channels AU and AU 2x2 Modem for a 2 channels AU In a Micro Outdoor BTS only Micro ODU is applicable The Installed section displays read only information about the actual Type of the Installed module or AU not detected General Properties The following read only AU properties are displayed Parameter Description Serial Number The serial number of the AU HW Version Number The hardware version of the AU HW Revision Number The hardware revision number Boot SW Version Number The boot software version FPGA Version Number Applicable only for Micro Outdoor BTS The FPGA version number IF Version Number Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The IF version number IF Revision Number Operational SW Version Number The version of the default software image used for rebooting the AU after system reset Shadow SW Version Number The version of the
14. Improved description SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Tasks 4Motion Mutual Neighboring New task infrastructure 4 8 SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Offline Configuration Tool New feature SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Managing a Single Device Creating Copying Deleting a BS Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page General Tab Template Manager The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation Step 3 Updated value range for Center Frequency SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab DL Diversity Mode Beam Forming is a licensed feature password is required SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Tasks Mutual Neighboring Updated May 2011 patch Offline Configuration Tool Updated May 2011 patch Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab Updated actions on selected neighbors in Neighbors List Added descriptions of updated Runtime Results and task s window after running the task May 2011 patch Mass Neighboring Task Removed May 2011 patch 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued File Manager Updated Duplicate Site File Manager used also for offline configuration files generated using the Offline Configuration Tool Updated screen captures for
15. Parameter Description Basic Rate The uplink basic rate QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Sub Burst Mode Maximum Sub Burst Mode The maximum size of a downlink sub burst The value of this parameter affects the achievable throughput in MIMO B point to point links one MS as follows Basic up to 12 Mbps Standard up to 20 Mbps Enhanced up to 25 Mbps Trial up to 30 Mbps Maximum throughput for two MSs may be increased to up to 16Mbps per MS when set to Standard Enhanced or Trial The default is Basic Recommended values for First Zone Minimum Size and Maximum Size 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Table 3 9 First Zone Minimum Size Recommended Value Range Bandwidth First Zone Basic Map Repetition Minimum Size symbols up to a MHz Scheme maximum of Y as defined below 7 10 Full Loading No Limitation or 8 2N No Limitation or 6 2N N AIA No Limitation or 4 2N 1 No Limitation or 4 2N Reuse 1 3 N A non trivial configuration 8 2N NI BR Oo 6 2N 1 6 2N 5 MHz Full Loading N A non trivial configuration No Limitation or 8 2N N BR On No Limitation or 6 2N 1 No Limitation or 4 2N Reuse 1 3 N A non triv
16. Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 5 2 5 3 UL DL Reference Classification Rule Tabs ESSE Service Pratio Corti Service Fw U Reference Classin aton Rue Dt Reference Clavel kati Aude Mode Create d 3 eiste Padi X H Revert d Rida Mamme 1d Rule Name Service Profle Config Name Yi Service Profile Config mame d Service Flow Fow ID H 1 7 Refresh w save Zem E Figure 5 19 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page UL Reference Classification Rule Tab Create Mode The UL DL Reference Classification Rule tables include the following parameters for each row 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Rule Name The name of the associated Classification Rule Service Profile Config The name alias of the Service Profile Name Service Flow Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow Existing UL DL Reference Classification Rules cannot be updated The UL DL Reference Classification Rule Row Editors include the following parameters that are mandatory when creating a new rule Parameter Description Rule Name The name of the associated Classification Rule Must be a name of a Classification Rule that already exists in the target man
17. 3 a Q Description Kee ei CG iv Tunnel Source IP Tunnel Destination IP 0 0 0 0 Service VLAN ID Del aut Gateway IP Address Subrat Mask Encapsulation Type Oker VLAN ID Enable Checksum 17 Seel e m Figure 3 32 Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab Add Service Interface The Service Interfaces table includes the following read only parameters for each of the configured service interfaces Parameter Description Interface Number The index number of the interface 1 80 An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 80 generated automatically during service interface creation Service Interface Name The name of the service interface By default the table is sorted by the order of Service Interfaces creation time click once on the table s Service Interface Name header to sort by ascending order click again to sort by descending order click again to return to default sorting Type The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN QnQ VPLS Trunk Select an entry in the table to open the Service Interface Editor for the selected service interface The following buttons are available below the Service Interfaces table 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Button Description Add Service Interface Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Service Interface Editor allowing configuration of parameters for the new
18. Ayp z Figure 3 2 Equipment View Page Macro Indoor BTS The Equipment View for Macro BTS page includes the following components M Chassis View Macro Indoor BTS or Components View Macro Outdoor BTS according to the type of the managed device RW Outdoor Units View M Sectors View E External Devices View 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D GE Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page 3 3 1 1 Chassis View Macro Indoor BTS The Chassis view is a graphical display of the BTS showing the installed components and their status Each of the installed modules NPU AUs PIUs PSUs and the 10 fans of the AVU module is marked in a color according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component The following information and actions are available M PIUs PSUs If the module is installed the background color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Power Supply Page on page 61 but is not installed the background color is yellow Double click on an installed or a required but not installed module to open the Power Supply configuration page refer to Power Supply Page on page 61 Double click on the NPU module to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 62 In an installed AU the ba
19. Configuring Templates Management Template Parameter Description Group Activation Defines whether collection of performance counters for the group will be activated deactivated Logging Page not applicable for Micro BTS The Logging page comprises the following tabs RW NPU Logging Tab E Log Severity Tab NPU Logging Tab FPU Longin Log Seventy Mode Create Updte O Delet Fiters By cicking on a selected property name you can add i to thes fiter Server P O Enable logan to server Enable logging to file k Figure 5 42 The Management Template Logging Page NPU Logging Tab The NPU Logging tab includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Management Template Parameter Description Server IP The server IP address of the server on which logs are to be maintained If logging to server is enabled the Server IP cannot be changed To change the Server IP you need three steps 1 Disable logging to server in the managed objects 2 Update the Server IP in the managed objects 3 Enable logging to server in the managed objects The default is 0 0 0 0 which is not a valid value the default in the device is 192 168 0 1 Enable logging to server Indicates whether or not logging to the server is enabled The default is disable Enable logging to file Indicates whether or not logging to file is enable
20. Displays the selected filtering criteria parameter and value for each selected filter For more details on using filters refer to Managing Tables and Template Modes below 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si D 5 1 2 ee Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Configuring Templates Section Description Configuration Area The work area allowing you to manage the relevant parameters Control Button Save Implements the modifications to the template Exiting the Configuration Template Editor or switching to another page without applying discards the changes Refresh Updates the displayed information according to current values acquired from the database Status Bar Indicates the status of the current operation and displays a progress bar when applicable Managing Tables and Template Modes The principles of managing template tables depend on the template Mode HM Managing Tables in Create Mode HM Managing Tables in Update Mode HM Managing Tables in Delete Mode Managing Tables in Create Mode Each row in the table includes one or more parameters that provides a unique identification of the entry In Create Mode The row identifier s are mandatory and are displayed for each saved entry To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row will be added to the table and a row configuration editor will open on the right side enabling you to configure row parameters
21. IP Routing Tab on page 47 Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 The VLAN ID of the Local Management IP interface is set to 9 and cannot be modified Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters This section describes the actions that will be executed by the management station following any change the Source IP Address or the Next Hop Gateway of an IP interface E Source IP Address HM Next Hop Gateway The actions described below are applicable also for the ASN GW Bearer Interface 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 1 Following a change in the Source IP Address of an IP interface the following actions will be executed automatically by the management system All relevant entries in the IP Routing table see IP Routing Tab on page 47 using the IP interface s Source IP Address as the route s Destination will be updated All relevant entries in ACL 199 see ACL Tab on page 40 using the IP interface s Source IP Address as the rule s Source IP Address will be updated 2 Following a change in the Next Hop Gateway of the External Management IP interface all relevant entries in the IP Routing table see IP Routing Tab on page 47 using the IP Next Hop Gateway as the route s Next Hop will be updated 3 5 2 1 2 Management Interface Tab for Micro Outdoor BTS Managem
22. In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS operating in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology the keep alive mechanism is applicable for each of the defined BSs In a Mini Centralized ASN GW the keep alive mechanism is applicable for the ASN GW entity In a Micro Outdoor BTS the keep alive mechanism is applicable for the defined BS The Keep Alive page allows simultaneously configuring the following parameters with the same values for all relevant entities Parameter Description Enable Keep Alive Use the check box to enable disable the keep alive mechanism for all relevant entities of the managed device The default is Disable unchecked The following parameters are applicable only if Keep Alive is enabled checked 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual O Cl Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Polling Period The period in seconds between polling sessions The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds The default is 60 seconds Polling Period x 1000 value in milliseconds cannot be lower than Retransmission Timeout x Number of Retransmissions 1 Number of Maximum number of retries if Retransmission Timeout has expired Retransmissions without getting a response The range is from O to 10 The default is 5 Retransmission Timeout Time in milliseconds to wait for a response before initiating another polling attempt or reaching a decision that the polled entity has failed if the
23. s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address and subnets of Default Gateway IP addresses Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface servicelfNetmask Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The subnet mask of the default gateway Should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces 6 3 4 7 Service Group Parameters Service Group parameters should be repeated for each of the relevant Service Groups Service Group parameters are applicable only for IP VPWS Mapped and VPLS Hub and Spoke Service Groups in Network Elements operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology npuBootupMode asngwStatic 2 Parameter Name in File Description dhcpOwnlpAddr Applicable for IP service groups The IP address of the DHCP server relay proxy Must be different from other instances of DHCP Own IP Address in the device For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 In DHCP Server mode the DHCP server IP address must be in the same subnet but outside the range allocated for users address pool as provisioned in the DHCP Server extDhcpSrvlpAddr Applicable for IP service grou
24. Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information is enabled Indicates whether RADIUS Attributes sub option 7 82 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Service Type Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Service Type attribute 6 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Vendor Specific Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Vendor Specific attribute 26 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Session Timeout Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Session Timeout attribute 27 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Agent Circuit ID and Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Sub option 1 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Circuit ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC The default is Not Set For ASCI
25. BS ID LSB SectorID CellSiteld 256 ServiceZone 32 256 Parameters and Configuration Rules Specific configuration parameters should be defined according to the following rules General Site Parameters General Site Parameters are applicable for all Network Elements Parameter Name in File Description siteld Site ID BTS Number The ID number of the device that is used by the management system as identifier of the device Must be unique in the managed network The range is from 1 to 999999 siteName Site Name BTS Name The name of the device An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters Recommended to be unique across the managed network siteAddress Site Address BTS Address The location of the device An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 70 characters siteRackLocation Site Rack Location Location in Site and Rack An optional description of the physical location of the device in the site rack A string of up to 32 characters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File 6 3 4 2 External Management Interface Parameters External Management Interface parameters are not applicable for Network Elements operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology npuBootupMode asngwStatic 2 if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified njpuMgmtConctMode unified 3 Parameter Name in File Description
26. E Trimble Lassen Applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS GPS Antenna Kit and when available Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS GPS model E SNTP Applicable only for Mini Centralized ASN GW The default is None Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS when a GPS receiver is used Indicates whether the BTS should stop data transmission if the GPS lost synchronization with its satellites and the holdover passed timeout has occurred Enable Disable When enabled the BTS will stop transmitting after being in holdover state for more than Holdover Passed Timeout The default is Enable Hold Over Passed Timeout Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS when a GPS receiver is used Defines the period in minutes for which the device provides holdover when the GPS loses synchronization with its satellites The range is from 0 to 2880 minutes The default is 480 minutes Time Zone Offset From UTC The offset of the local time from the UTC The range is 12 00 to 13 00 in 30 minutes resolution The default is 00 00 UTC Time and Date The UTC Coordinated Universal Time date and time Configurable only if the GPS Type is set to None Otherwise it is the read only data received from the GPS receiver SNTP server The format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy hh between 0 and 23 mm between 0 and 59 ss between 0 and 59 dd mm with usual date
27. Revert d Service Interlace Name Iw Service Interface Nome cescnetion ae m m d Tunnel Destination P o o np 0 O Enable Checksum E Refresh _ v swe Figure 5 2 The Template Configuration Editor Tab with a Table The Template Configuration Editor screen comprises the following sections Section Description Navigation Pane Allowing selection of the configuration page for the selected group of parameters Template Type and Release Version are indicated on the top Title Bar not shown Identifies the template s MO Managed Object and SW Version It also includes standard icons for minimizing maximizing or closing the Configuration Editor Validation Errors Display area for possible configuration errors such as a value that is not valid or contradiction between configured values of two or more parameters Configurations with Validation Errors cannot be saved Page and Tab Identification Identification of the current Page and Tab Tab Selection Allow selection of the configuration tab for the selected sub group of parameters Mode Applicable only for some tabs with tables In a tab with scalar values only the Update mode is applicable Enables selection of the configuration mode Create Update Delete for the relevant table s entries For more details refer to Managing Tables and Template Modes below Filters Applicable only for some tabs with tables using Update or Delete Mode
28. Ride Applied on Interface ANY Service Flow Data Gebuer Type ANY Service Flore Tr alti Priority w Il Service Flow Mada Flow Type ANY Auctions Cater OSCP Helga eg Tee SCC 1p Priority Marking fo E Plo ce Bee wv apy Figure 3 34 QoS Marking Page The QoS Marking page comprises two sections the Bearer Plane QoS Rules table and the QoS Rule Parameters Editor The Bearer Plane QoS Rules table includes the following read only parameters for each existing rule Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule An auto sequential number from 1 to a maximum of 20 generated automatically during rule creation Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS marking rule By default the table is sorted by the order of Marking Rules creation time click once on the table s Marking Rule Name header to sort by ascending order click again to sort by descending order click again to return to default sorting Select an entry to open the QoS Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add QoS Rule Adds a new entry to the Bearer Plane QoS Rules table and opens the QoS Rule Parameters Editor allowing to configure the new rule s parameter 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Button Desc
29. The file is loaded first to the applicable NPU s and then to the AU s If the file already exists in the NPU the first stage is skipped If it exists in the AU the process will be skipped Note that the NPU can store a maximum of 3 AU SW files If a new SW file should be loaded the oldest file that is not mapped as the operational file of any AU will be deleted If all 3 files are mapped to AUs a situation that is not expected under regular conditions you must first modify the mapping using CLI see Upgrading the AU section in the System Manual to enable deletion of at least one SW file Switch over The AU s reset and boot from the shadow file If successful the files are switched automatically and the new SW version is set as the Operational mapped file Delete AU version from If selected deletes the selected software file from the selected NPU equipment Note that you can remove only one file at a time Only a file that is not used as the Operational mapped version can be removed File Name Applicable only if the selected option s include either Download to Shadow or Delete AU Version from NPU The name of the file to be loaded or deleted If the selected action is Download to Shadow the drop down menu enables selecting one of the relevant files available in the default firmware folder If another TFTP server is selected see below the file s should be available in the root of this server Otherwise you
30. ee a Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template 5 2 4 2 PHS Rules Tab va Mode Create Q Dekte FA Ke J Revert d tme rr Name Z d Fek Value d Mask Value b s g verty value D d Ss Vatue Bytes us A Rofrash Sue Figure 5 9 The ASN GW Template SFA Page PHS Rules Tab Create Mode The PHS Rules table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Name The name alias of the PHS Rule The PHS Rule Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name alias of the PHS Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory when creating a new rule Field Value The PHSF value that is the header string to be suppressed Mandatory when creating a new rule The default is null Must be replaced by a valid string Mask Value bits The PHSM that contains the bit mask of the PHSF with the bits set that is to be suppressed Mandatory when creating a new rule The default is null Must be replaced by a valid value 1 40 Verify Value Indicates whether or not the PHS header is to be verified The default is no 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ei D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Size Value Bytes The size of the header
31. request renewal of a lease that has expired The range is from 1 to 100 The default is 50 The renewal Time must be lower than rebind Time This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Rebind Time The rebind interval as a percentage of the Lease Time This is passed to the MS DHCP client The range is from 1 to 99 The default is 75 This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Offer Reuse Time The interval in seconds within which the MS should send a DHCP request to accept the address sent by the NPU If the MS does not accept the address within this period the MS is deregistered The range is from 1 to 120 The default is 5 seconds Management Server Server Host Name The server host name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 64 characters The default is null Client Boot File Name The client boot file name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 128 characters The default is null Vendor Class Identifier The option 60 string indicating the type of hardware firmware used by relevant CPEs Up to 30 characters An empty string null means that DHCP Option 60 is disabled If the value is other than null the value configured in the CPE must match this value for proper
32. 0 In the device the default is 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway IP Applicable only in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the IP Address address of the Default Gateway to be provided by the local DHCP Server with the device IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The default is 0 0 0 0 Primary DNS Server Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode IP Address of the first DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The default is 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode IP Address of the second DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The default is 0 0 0 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Renewal Time of Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The interval as a percentage of the Lease Time after which the MS can request renewal of a lease that has expired This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The renewal Time must be lower than rebind Time The range
33. 0 which is not a valid value The default for Vid Map End is 1 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of other existing VPWS Mapped Service Group 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description IP Address Pool Start and Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server mode The start and end IP Address Pool End values of IP addresses in the address pool Mandatory when creating a new IP Service Group in Server mode DHCP IP addresses in the pool shall not overlap with the DHCP address pool defined in an existing service group and with IP addresses of host interfaces Bearer External Management Internal Management and Local Management The defaults are 0 0 0 0 for both parameters In the device the defaults are 0 0 0 0 Start and 255 255 255 255 End Must be changed to valid values when creating a new IP Service Group in Server mode Subnet Mask Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the subnet mask to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The default is 0 0 0
34. 1 Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Introduction Introduction The Mass Configuration Wizard is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Operators are faced with the need for quick and efficient deployment of a large number of new sites once the operation goes into its commercial phase As many of the installations share most of the configuration parameters all the common configuration parameters can be copied from one site to all others However some configuration parameters must be configured per site The Mass Configuration Wizard offers a simple process for creating multiple site configuration files INFORMATION The Mass Configuration Wizard in the current release supports the following products E SW Versions 2 5 213 and 3 0 5 Macro BTS and Macro BTS ODU operating in Centralized ASN GW ES ASN Topology Transparent Mode E SW Version 3 0 10 and 3 0 20 All Network Elements The Mass Configuration Wizard is based on the following pre prepared inputs A A golden site configuration backup file B An Excel file with specific configuration details for new sites For each site whose specific configuration details are provided in the Excel file the Mass Configuration Wizard will generate a validated and signed XML configuration file to be used during installation INFORMATION SE By default the Mass Configuration Wizard can be used to create a single offline configuration file using A an Excel file contai
35. 1 99 Allows you to filter traffic based on the source and destination IP addresses M Extended ACL 100 198 Allows you to filter traffic based on the source and destination IP addresses source and destination ports and protocol M Extended ACL 199 is used only for QoS Marking rules for classifying traffic originating from the NPU and applying DSCP and or Priority values for proper QoS handling of traffic that meets certain criteria This ACL cannot be deleted By default ACL 199 includes 8 pre configured rules referencing pre configured classifiers that point to pre configured actions IP Interface Type of Protocol Source Classifier Action DSCP Priority Source IP Traffic Port ID ID Address Bearer RADIUS UDP 1812 1 1 7 7 Bearer Mobile IP UDP 434 2 2 7 7 Agent Bearer WiMAX ASN UDP 2231 3 3 7 7 Control Plane Protocol 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity IP Interface Type of Protocol Source Classifier Action DSCP Priority Source IP Traffic Port ID ID Address Internal OBSAI UDP 10009 4 4 0 Management message not applicable exchange for between NPU Mini Centralize and AU d ASN GW Internal Trivial File UDP 69 5 5 0 Management Transfer not applicable for Mini Centralize d ASN GW External Telnet TCP 23 6 6 0 Management External SSH Remote TCP 22 7 7 0 Managemen
36. 12 12 12 0 101 0 Report 10 20 30 35 3 7 Don t aul 192 168 19 3 0 192 168 19 Results on page 9 Total 9 a PageSize 100 CY J O l a O Inactive Fompletedwitherrord Figure 8 10 Mutual Neighboring Task Window 8 7 2 The Mutual Neighboring Task Window The task window includes the following components E Operation 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei 8 7 2 1 8 7 2 2 8 7 2 3 Chapter 8 Tasks Mutual Neighboring Task E Data Retrieval HM Results Table HM Custom Operations Menu Operation The Operation radio buttons enable defining the operation to be executed for the next run of the task as described below Option Description Report All In the next run the task will load all the neighboring definitions from the network see Data Retrieval below and check all of them for mutuality It will report all the results in a tabular view see Results Table Section 8 7 2 3 below This is the default mode Fix All In the next run the task will load all the neighboring definitions from the network see Data Retrieval Section 8 7 2 2 below and will check all of them for mutuality If needed it will try fixing all non mutual definitions In addition it will attempt updating all relevant parameters in all BSs It will report all the results in a tabular view see Results
37. 5 17 203 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Create Mode 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Figures Site Sector Page Micro Outdoor BTS NENNEN ENNEN 161 Network Maintenance Retrieval Of MS Data 165 Network Maintenance Retrieval of All MSS Data aa 166 Network Maintenance Single MS De Reetetration AE 168 Network Maintenance All MSs De RegiStration cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaneees 169 The Template Configuration Editor Tab with Scalar Parameters sssssssssssnesssesensens 171 The Template Configuration Editor Tab With a Table AEN 172 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Client Tab 176 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA ACCESS Tab 177 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab Create Mode The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Create Mode 181 The ASN GW Template QoS Marking Page Create Mode AAA 190 The ASN GW Template SFA Page SFA Config Tab 192 The ASN GW Template SFA Page PHS Rules Tab Create Model 193 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Config Tab Create Mode 194 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Protocol Tab Create Mode The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Address Tab Create EENEG 197 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Address Tab Cre See 198 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Port Tab Creat
38. 6 2 Hot Lining Profiles Tab Asn Hot n Hot Linky Profies Hut Lang Acces Let Mode Create Updste OOrkte Fad X H Revert d Prefie Name l Profile name S O min Redirect URL Figure 5 21 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Profiles Tab Create Mode The Hot Lining Profiles table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Profile Name The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile The Hot Lining Profiles Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Profile Name The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory when creating a new profile HTTP Redirect URL The HTTP redirect URL to be used by filter rules with HTTP Redirect action This is the Redirection location to be used in Http Redirection message Must be configured URL in ASCII string format if in any of the filter rules associated with the profile the configured action is HTTP Redirect the string should be start with http or https Enable Profile Enables Disables the hot lining profile The default is Disable 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template 5 2 6 3 Hot Lining Access List Tab Leem eg Hot uning Proies ot Uring A
39. 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 Default BS Templates The system is supplied with several default BS templates for some typical deployment scenarios The template s name provide the main properties of the relevant deployment scenario as illustrated by the following examples 3 0 5_Reuse3_10M_MIMO_Capacity_Fix_Data amp Voip A template for devices running SW version 3 0 5 reuse 3 a bandwidth of 10MHz MIMO diversity optimization of capacity for Fixed deployment Data amp VoIP traffic 3 0 10_Reuse1_Bit23_10M_BF_Coverage_Fix_Data amp Voip A template for devices running SW version 3 0 10 for reuse 1 with Map Major Groups 2 and 3 selected using a bandwidth of 10MHz Beam Forming diversity optimization of coverage for Fixed deployment of Data amp VoIP traffic Default templates cannot be edited or deleted To create a different template based on an existing default template select the required source template and use the Copy option 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gi 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 1 1 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Management Template Management Template The Management Template comprises the following pages HM SNMP Managers Page WR Performance Page WR Logging Page not applicable for Micro BTS SNMP Managers Page The SNMP Managers page comprises the following tabs WR SNM
40. ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVA
41. Added AlvariCRAFT to the shared platform March 2009 The Equipment Manager Updated to reflect all GUI changes of August 2009 Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 New feature Open Alarms Updated functionality of Multiple Configuration and Backup Configuration options Site Equipment View Page Added support for Outdoor BTS General August 2009 updates improvements 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Site Page General Tab Removed Shelf HW Version parameter August 2009 Updated range for Site Address Updated ranges for Longitude and Latitude Updated description of Product Type Updated Site Number change process Added warning a change in ASN Topology will take effect after next reset Site Page Dry Contacts Tab New feature Send Alarm condition for Input August 2009 Alarms Applicable only for Indoor BTS Site Page Time Tab Removed Clock Source parameters August 2009 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Removed External Management VLAN ID August 2009 Added AU Maintenance VLAN ID Ethernet port are configurable also if Admin Status is enabled Up Added warning a change in Connectivity Mode will take effect after next reset CSCD port is applicable only for Indoor BTS Updated description of VLAN Assigned IP Interface Page No need to shut down the interface for August 2009 modifying IP Interface parameters Added warning rese
42. Address the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the serving device Associated Service Flows per flow assigned to the MS SF ID The Service Flow ID Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager Parameter Description Direction The direction of the Service Flow Up or Down Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address The following buttons are now available Button Description Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data Home Click to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window De Register MS Click to force de registration of the MS 4 1 2 Retrieval of All MSs Data The Retrieval of All MSs Data option is used to retrieve general details related to all MSs served by a specific ASN GW as maintained by the ASN GW gt Bt canman anager x L tze very settings x GC tek mansoer x EA moon x gionem x ggf Network maintenance x Network Maintenance Management Target O FU Management IP Address ai AW GW IP adkess ASN GW BTS Number 1 Ami Network Martenance Server 10 10 107 117 User odan Figure 4 2 Network Maintenance Retrieval of All MSs Data You can select the serving entity by E ASN GW IP Address th
43. Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Software updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Software updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual amp KE Disclaimer Legal Rights a The Software is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK
44. Dy Reins Bemer trterface V ee Ed Besrer Aan Pools Raberbcaton Control rafik Qos Rules Besrer Traffic Qos nes Hode ge Updste Se Fites By dhing on a selected property name you can add R to this fiter O B5 Delauk Athenticator IP Q Ative MSs Figure 5 36 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab The Authentication parameters are Parameter Description Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW In Distributed Address ASN GW Topology this is typically the IP address of the NPU s Bearer interface Active MSs The threshold for the number of MSs in active operation state not Idle served by the BS Exceeding this threshold sets the alarm Excessive MS number The range is 0 1024 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled The default is O the default in the device is 1024 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Cd Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 3 4 Control Traffic QoS Rules Leger L Acta Pools Y Authentication Control Trafic Qo Rides Wearer If Qos ndes Mode Create Update Dwele Per By cru on a selected property rem you can add bo this Det C INTRA ASN Diere Code Port E INTRA ASN 802 1p Priority D C ernal Management Offserv Code Pont O iterna Management 802 ip Pratz Di oh Refresh 7 Saus Figure 5 37 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface
45. Enabling Discovery Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery For general details on discovering devices refer to the relevant sections in the Management System Manual The SNMP agent in the devices supports SNMP v2c To allow remote management of the site and to enable discovery by the management system some basic parameters must be configured locally using CLI via the MON port of the equipment Refer to the equipment System Manual for information on how to access the CLI either via the MON port or via Telnet and how to use it The following configuration steps describe the minimum mandatory configuration actions required Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 1 Clear Previous Configuration Clear existing site configuration must be executed for used NPUs Restore to factory default and reboot using the following command npu restore factory default 2 Connectivity Mode The connectivity mode determines how traffic is to be routed between the NPU and the BSs AAA server and external Management System servers The default connectivity mode is In Band IB via the Data port Alternatively the NPU can be managed Out Of Band OOB via the dedicated Management port In Unified mode the bearer IP domain and external management IP domain via the Data port are unified To view the current and configured connectivity mode use the command npu show connectivity mode To change the connectivity mode to Out Of Band
46. Frame Number Offset Map Major Groups Default Authenticator IP e LH Figure 3 41 Copy Existing BS Window 3 Configure the required parameters for the new BS all other parameters will be copied from the source BS and may be changed later Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS Replace the BS ID LSB of the source BS with a new value The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 The default is the BS ID of the source BS must be changed to a unique value 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Operator ID The unique Identifier of the wireless network operator The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs in the managed wireless network Typically the Operator ID copied from the source BS should not be changed The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 The default is the Operator ID of the source BS Bearer IP The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS Center Frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are M 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2487 5 to
47. GW The Hot Lining page comprises the following components E Enable Hot Lining RW Profiles Table RW Profile Editor E Filter Rules Enable Hot Lining Parameter Description Enable Hot Lining Enable Disable the Hot Lining feature The following Hot Lining parameters are configurable only if Hot Lining is enabled The default is Enable Profiles Table The Hot Lining Profiles table includes the following read only parameters for each entry Parameter Description Profile Number The index number of the hot lining profile An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 10 generated automatically during filter addition Profile Name The unique per BTS name of the profile HTTP Redirect URL The HTTP redirect URL to be used by filter rules with HTTP Redirect action or null Enable Profile The status of the hot lining profile Disable Enable The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table allowing to configure the parameters of the new profile in the profile Editor section Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Select an entry to open the Profile Editor and the Filter Rules table for the selected Profile Profile Editor The Profile Editor includes the following parameters for the selected profile 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO d i Ch
48. ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Subscriber ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Subscriber ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box QoS Marking Page The QoS Marking page enables managing QoS marking rules for the bearer plane based on parameters such as traffic priority and the type of service media and interface For each marking rule you can define the output parameters outer DSCP and VLAN priority values to be applied on service flows using best match logic For example if we have the following two marking rules for BE traffic Data Flow Delivery Type set to BE A Interface Type set to Internal R6 interface All other parameters set to ANY B All other parameters including interface type are set to ANY Than Rule A will apply to all BE traffic transmitted on the internal R6 interface Rule B will apply to all other BE traffic meaning traffic transmitted on the external R3 interface 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW QoS Marking Boater Plane Qos Rules Rude Number Ride Status Marking de Qos Rude Parameters d Enable Fiat Marking Rule Name Enable ext _defoult E Rule Status Enable Iv Cant
49. Infrastructure 4 8 May 2011 patch Template Manager Updated Default BS Templates section version 3 0M templates Updated screen capture for Infrastructure 4 8 May 2011 patch Configuring Templates Renamed section was previously Template September 2011 Manager Moved general Template Manager sections to Infrastructure Manual Moved Default BS Templates to BS Templates section Managing a Single Device Radio Updated default value of Required C N September 2011 Advanced Page Power Control Tab Levels ACK to 12 Configuring Templates The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab Managing a Single Device Radio Updated supported values for Total Uplink September 2011 Basic Page Air Frame Structure Duration General Tab Added details on DL UL ratio as a function of BS Bandwidth and Total Uplink Duration Configuring Templates The BS Updated supported values for Total Uplink September 2011 Template Radio Basic Page Air Frame Duration Structure Tab Managing a Single Device Radio Updated Table 3 10 Calculating the Upper September 2011 Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Limit Value Y for Minimum and Maximum Tab Size on page 140 Managing a Single Device Added The default pre configured actions and September 2011 Management Page QoS Marking classifiers cannot be deleted or modified Rules Tab Managing a Single Device ASN GW Updated configuration rules for Source IP Septemb
50. Macro Indoor BTS Interface NPU External Management Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Interface Centralized ASN GW NPU Bearer Interface Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 3 5 2 6 2 ASN GW not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for R3 Interface Traffic R3 Interface Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for R6 Interface Total Traffic R6 Interface Total Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW R6 Interface Traffic Per R6 Interface BS Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini BS Centralized ASN GW MS Resources Reports Management Initial NE Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Load Balancing Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Provisioned QoS Management Provisioned QoS Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 3 5 2 6 3 BS Counter Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for BS Counters Traffic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS Utilization Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS TxR1 Total Traffic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS RxR1 Total Traffic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS BS General Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mi
51. Macro Outdoor BTS are Shutdown Rx Only or No Shutdown normal operation The default is No Shutdown External The Equipment node includes the following pages HM ODU Node applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS with ODU lt gt Page for each of the existing created ODU entities M Radio Node applicable only for a Micro Outdoor BTS with Radio page for the two radios of the BTS M GPS Page M Power Feeder Page Applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS BR Antenna Page Applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Indoor BTS ODU Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS From the navigation tree for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS you can create new ODU entities or delete an existing ODU entity see Creating Deleting an ODU below The ODU node includes an ODU lt gt Page for each created ODU Creating Deleting an ODU ODU object creation deletion is applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS In a Micro Outdoor BTS two Radio objects are created automatically and cannot be deleted To create a new ODU 1 Right click the ODU sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New ODU window 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ER Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Mandatory Parameters ODU type ODU 2300 2360 000N 36 1x1 N O lv ODU Number ODU2 Lee ES Figure 3 25 New ODU Window 2 Inthe New ODU window select from the drop down
52. Mapping for Micro Outdoor ODU Bit Set to 1 Failure None No Failure 1 No signal or no TX RX from AU Failed to read calibration file The ODU temperature is high HW not compatible with the selected Radio type Not used Current out of range Synthesizer Lock Failure 2 3 4 5 6 Power out of range 7 8 9 RX gain out of range Rx signal is too high 10 32 Not used 3 6 2 3 GPS Page In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS the GPS page enables defining the GPS receiver configuration In a Mini Centralized ASN GW it enables defining the SNTP parameters It also enables defining other time synchronization settings 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment GPS chain IS GPS Type Trimble Lassen M Daylight Saving Disable E Stop TX After Hold Over Timeout Enable M Start Date Stop Date Hold Over Passed Timeout 720 Advance Hour Factor 2 v Time Zone Offset From UTC jj 01 00 UTC Time and Date ii CH a In e E Ea a Ee Read GPS Time daily Read GPS Time At ot 05 00 21 Him Local Time and Date 14 h thle sh 17 f b 2010 B5 Clock External 1 PPS Clock Enable Ki Location Longitude om o JE el deg
53. Reset The site will be restarted All changes in parameters that require reset will take effect after restart Reset To Factory Default The system will be restarted with factory default configuration IMPORTANT All configurations will be deleted This also means loosing the ability to manage the unit from remote Local configuration of specific mandatory parameters using CLI is required to enable remote management of the site using the management system Refer to the Enabling Discovery on page 1 for details 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gel Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Equipment Template Option Description Reset To Factory Default With Connectivity The system will be restarted with factory default configuration except to parameters that are required to maintain management connectivity to the unit The parameters that are maintained without any change include E BTS Number HM Management interfaces parameters required for connectivity VLAN ID Source IP Address IP Subnet Mask and Next Hop Gateway E L1 amp L2 parameters E SNMP Traps Managers configurations E Authorized Managers configurations No Action No reset or shutdown operation 5 5 4 Shutdown Power AU to ODU Tab NPU System Management EAU Control Control Shutdown Power AU to ODU elete Filters By clicking on a selected property name you can add it to
54. Street 2nd Floor An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 70 characters Product Type A read only description of the product type Location in Site and Rack An optional description of the physical location of the device in the site rack A string of up to 32 characters Contact Person The name of the site contact person An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Page NOTE BTS Number Site ID Change Process 1 Change the BTS Number Site ID using either the management system or CLI If you are using CLI run the command npu config site identifier lt site id lt 0O 999999 gt gt and save the new configuration using the command npu write 2 Restart the site NPU to apply the change This will clean the active alarms and the Performance Monitoring files with the old BTS Number ID from the database of the NPU 3 Delete old site from the database of the management system In the Equipment Manager select the BTS and click Delete 4 The management system will automatically close all open alarms remove the old BTS Number ID from all the tasks such as Performance Collection Backup Configuration and Keep Alive It will also stop processing new alarms form this old site 5 The user should perform manual discovery of the new device with the o
55. The ID number of the device Site ID as configured during creation of the file NE Type The type of product used for preparing the file Software Version The Software Version specified during creation of the file File Name The name of the file that includes the date and time at which the file was created Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system using the real time clock of the client Select one or several entries and right click to view the following management options Parameter Description Restore Opens the Restore Task Editor for a selected file enabling to load the file to the target device See Restore Configuration Task on page 295 The Restore Task Editor can also be opened by double clicking on the selected file s entry Delete Deletes the selected file s from the database Export Exports the selected file s to the client file system Click to open the Save window browse to the desired location on the client file system and click Save to export the file s Import Imports an Offline Configuration file from the client file system Click to open the Import Offline Configuration File window browse to the location on the client file system where the file is stored select the file and click Import NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to
56. The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Destination Address Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects IP Destination Address Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The IP Destination address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 Must be set to a valid value IP Destination Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP Destination addresses The default is 0 0 0 0 the default in the device is 255 255 255 255 If selected must be set to a valid value Enable IP Destination Indicates whether the use of an associated IP Destination address is Classifier enabled for the classification rule The default is no 5 2 4 7 Classification Rule Source Port Tab EA cona Il Pr Res Classtcation conio Oetrange Protocol Clasafication Rule source Address Glesstication Ride Destination Address Casse Rue source Port cl lt gt Mode Create viele QDelte Add IS s SP Revert Y Cl
57. The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation See limitations in Table 3 9 below Other values should be avoided In the current release this is the actual size of the first zone For reuse 1 the default no limitation can be used the actual size will be set dynamically according to the configuration For reuse 3 a specific value must be configured 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Maximum Size Maximum size in symbols for first zone Used mainly for performance control capability within frame The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation Maximum Size cannot be lower than Minimum Size In the current release the value of this parameter is ignored First Zone size is defined only by Minimum Size parameter Maximum Map Size Limits the maximum size of maps in slots The available options are 10 20 300 10xN where N 1 30 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation Map Major Groups The major groups allocated to the BS for maps transmission as indicated by the selection of the corresponding check boxes If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out Bits 0 2 and 4 must be set checked If BW 7 10 MHz with reuse 1 all bits O to 5 must be set checked For BW 7 10 MHz
58. Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeMAX BreezeLITE 4Motion and or other products and or services referenced herein are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners WiMAX Forum is a registered trademark of the WiMAX Forum WiMAX the WiMAX Forum logo WiMAX Forum Certified and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive Warranty With respect to the Software Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers software updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty
59. Version Read only The software version of the signal processor of the GPS receiver if used 3 6 2 3 9 SNTP Primary Secondary Server Applicable only for Mini Centralized ASN GW 3 6 2 4 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the Primary Secondary SNTP Server Operational Status Read only The operational status of the Primary Secondary SNTP Server Enable Disable according to the keep alive response Power Feeder Page Applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS The high power PIU can support a maximum current of 58 A 40 5 VDC In certain installations with a relatively high number of ODUs this current may not be sufficient to power the shelf and all the ODUs In such installations the ODU Power Feeder is used as an additional power source providing power 48 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment VDC to ODUs It transfers transparently all signals between the AU and the ODU while injecting DC power received from an external source Each ODU Power Feeder unit can serve up to four ODUs 7 EMS_after_offline on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment e E Power Feeder Unit Number I Port Number AU Slot Number AU Port Number 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 add New Power Feeder E ach Done Figure 3 29 Power Feeder Page The Power Feeder table includes the following parameters
60. allocation of IP parameters The default is null 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Vendor Specific Information Name Option 43 Name string Up to 64 characters The default is InternetGatewayDevice ManagementServer URL Vendor Specific Information Value Option 43 Value string Up to 64 characters The default is null The DHCP Function Editor for Relay mode includes the following parameters Parameter Description External DHCP Server IP Address The IP address of the external DHCP server The default is 0 0 0 0 Must be configured to a valid IP address Enable Relay Agent Information Mark to enable Relay Agent Information Option 82 All following parameters are applicable only if Relay Agent Information is enabled The default is Disable unmarked Relay Agent Information Parameters Enable Unicast Relay Agent Information Indicates whether the Unicast parameter is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Enable RADIUS Attributes Indicates whether RADIUS Attributes sub option 7 82 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable RADIUS Attribute Messag es applicable only if Enable RADIUS Attributes is enabled Service Type Indicates whether Service Type attribute 6 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Vendor Specific Indicates whether
61. among relevant users E Equal Rate Throughput Fairness E Equal Time Resource Fairness The selected mode is applicable for both uplink and downlink schedulers The default is Equal Rate Scheduler DL Abuse Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate Protection Level None No Protection Low Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with very low DL transmission Rate Medium Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low DL transmission Rate The default is None 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description Scheduler UL Abuse Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate Protection Level None No Protection Low Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with very low UL transmission Rate Medium Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low UL transmission Rate The default is None 5 3 3 R6 R8 Bearer Interface The R6 R8 Bearer Interface page is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The R6 R8 Bearer Interface page comprises the following tabs Bearer Tab ASNGW Pools Tab E E RW Authentication Tab WR Control Traffic QoS Rules a Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab 5 3 3 1 Bearer Tab va Terror Lasma Pools Authectication control Traffic Qos Rules Bearer Traffic Qos ndes Mode se Updte Crete Fiters By
62. an installed and associated ODU HPA Card Read only Indicates whether the port is connected to an HPA card installed not installed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description HPA HW Version Read only The hardware version of the HPA connected to this port Applicable only if an HPA card exists in an installed and associated ODU HCOS SW Version Read only The software version of the HCO8 controlling card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU CPLD SW Version Read only The software version of the CPLD controlling card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU Serial Number Read only The serial number of the ODU card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU ODU Status Read only A decimal number representing the value of a 32 bits mask indicating possible failures For details refer to Table 3 5 below Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU Tx Operational Status Read only The current operational status of the Tx port In Rx ports ports 2 and 4 in a 4x2 ODU always set to Disable Table 3 5 ODU Status Mask Bit Mapping for Macro Indoor Outdoor ODU Bit Set to 1 Failure None No Failure 1 AU Communication with ODU was lost 2 An error was detecte
63. and Spoke This type of service group supports the VPLS hub and spoke model Virtual Private LAN Services VPLS provide connectivity between geographically dispersed customer sites as if they were connected using a LAN transporting Ethernet 802 3 and VLAN 802 1Q traffic across multiple sites that belong to the same L2 broadcast domain Sites that belong to the same broadcast domain expect broadcast multicast and unicast traffic to be forwarded to the proper location s This requires MAC address learning aging on a per pseudowire basis and packet replication across pseudowires for multicast broadcast traffic and for flooding of unknown unicast destination traffic In a hub and spoke model one PE Provider Edge router that is acting as a hub connects all other PE routers that act as spokes in a given VPLS domain The virtual switch on a spoke PE router has exactly one pseudowire connecting to the virtual switch on the hub PE router No pseudowire interconnects the virtual switches on spoke PE routers A hub and spoke topology by definition is loop free so it does not need to enable spanning tree protocols or split horizon on pseudowires To provide Layer 2 connectivity among the virtual switches on spoke PE routers the hub PE router must turn off split horizon on the pseudowires When split horizon is disabled you can forward or flood packets among different pseudowires at the hub PE router Each of the VPLS Service Groups is associated with a separ
64. and month rules yyyy between 2006 to 9999 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Read GPS Time Applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS when a GPS receiver is used The interval after which the NPU should obtain the GPS time for frame synchronization and send it to the AUs The available options are E Hourly E Daily E Monthly E Yearly The default is Daily Read GPS Time At Applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS when a GPS receiver is used The time when the NPU should obtain the GPS time for frame synchronization The format is hh mm ss dd mm hh between 0 and 23 mm between 0 and 59 ss between 0 and 59 dd mm with usual date and month rules Only relevant components are available for configuration according to the selected Read GPS Time The default is 04 05 00 21 04 Local Time and Date A read only display of the local date and time using 24 hour clock as calculated using the UTC Time and Date and taking into account the Time Zone Offset From UTC and Daylight Saving Time parameters The format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy For example 13 04 23 12 07 2006 Daylight Saving The Daylight Saving parameter is used to enable or disable the daylight saving feature using the following Start Date Stop Date and Advance Hour Factor parameters The default is Disable Start Date When Daylight Saving is ena
65. and time at which the task was created Type The type of file to be used by the task E Site Configuration A backup Configuration file E Offline Configuration An Offline Configuration file prepared using the Mass Configuration Wizard E Vendor Configuration A vendor configuration file 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ga D 296 Chapter 8 Tasks Restore Configuration Task Parameter Description Name For a new Restore Task click on the Browser button to open the applicable Selector window according to the selected Type above and select the file to be used by the task Creation Date The read only creation date of the selected file Source Equipment Applicable only for Site Configuration Restore task The details of the source equipment of the selected backup configuration file Auto Reset Click to automatically reset the target equipment after successful completion of the Restore task The Target Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The number of the device Site ID as configured in the device BTS Name The name of the device as configured in the device NE Type The device type IP Address The IP address of the device For Site Conf
66. appears more than once npulpIfiIp Parameter npulpIflp with value 10 10 142 194 should be an IP Address in the same subnet as the External Management 10 10 141 168 255 255 255 0 from the backup file Figure 6 5 Mass Configuration Wizard Invalid Unique Parameters Message The next step will become available only if a usable Excel file is selected 6 4 4 Mass Configuration Wizard Merge File A table displaying the main identification parameters of the new sites Site ID Site Name and NE External Management IP Address will be displayed Click Next to generate the configuration files for the listed sites If there are any consistency problems a Consistency Rules Issues window will open indicating the detected problems New configuration files can be generated only if there are no consistency rules issues for all sites defined in the Excel file 6 4 5 Mass Configuration Wizard Summary If there were no consistency rules issues all the required configuration files can be generated The Summary window displays the main details of the files that will be generated Click Finish to generate the files and save them in the Offline Configuration File Manager as Offline Configuration Offline Cfg files see Offline Configuration File Manager on page 315 After discovery of a new site by the 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual B D oO Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Using the Mass Configuration Wizard ma
67. aun EE E EE 110 37 9 PPS eege EE Ee 113 ES 125 3 8 1 Creating Copying Deleting a BS eeNENENEEENEEKNEKSRNESENEEEENEEERNEEKNEEEKEEEEEEEESNEEAENEen 125 38 2 6 2 gene econ anne eee EE EE 129 3 8 3 R6 R8 Bearer Ittre 153 3 9 Site dE 158 3 9 1 Creating Deleting a Site Sector ENEE 158 39 2 Site SECTOR EEN 158 Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager ek 163 4 1 The Network Maintenance Manager KREE REENEN ENEE ENNEN ENEE ENN 164 4 1 1 Retrieval of MS Eeer ote cncceseasanncuiacuctanemencsabeeteebienadunniwsuueeeealgantemeasis 164 4 1 2 Retrieval of All MSs Eegeregie ege 166 4 13 Single MS De RegistratiOM issin a aaa 168 4 1 4 All MSs De Registration E 169 Chapter 5 Configuring TemplateS s ssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 170 5 1 Configuring Terai cg Bc cs ccs ew esac see Dice icc ies cee Sa nnmnnn 171 5 1 1 The Template Configuration Echter 22gtsese ekuegegee kugteggk ee SEEe EE 171 5 1 2 Managing Tables and Template Modes ANNER 173 51 3 Herren 175 5 2 ASN GW Template cca acs Sen esecek cts eect choc eaaa aep arre aeiia r aeaiiai 176 5 21 AAA Page nipe Ee 176 5 2 2 Service EH PZE iss iisip a EEA 178 5 2 3 QoS Marking Page eege EE 190 5 2 4 SFA Pabe urpi a a Eeer 191 52 5 Service Protile Pae nasrne E 203 5 2 6 Hot inng Page ririri e a a aa a aana 208 5 3 BS ET d 213 5 3 1 Radio EE 213 5 3 2 Radi Advanced Emtee 223 5 3 3 R6 R8 El EE 232 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Q
68. be applied Uplink or Downlink The default is Uplink 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Filter Rules IP Address If Direction is Downlink then this is the downlink Source IP Address If Direction is Uplink then this is the uplink Destination IP Address 255 255 255 255 means not applicable ignore this condition The default is 0 0 0 0 in the device the default is 255 255 255 255 Filter Rules Mask The Subnet Mask associated with the configured IP Address The default is 0 0 0 0 in the device the default is 255 255 255 255 Filter Source Port Start The minimum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Filter Source Port Stop The maximum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is O in the device the default is 65535 Filter Rules Destination Port Start The minimum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Filter Rules Destination Port Stop The maximum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 0 in the device the default is 65535 Filter Rules DSCP Start The minimum value of DSCP range The default is 0 Filter Rules DSCP Stop The maximum value of DSCP range The default is O in the device the default is 63 Filter Action Action to be performed on packets that match the rule Pass Drop HTTP Redirect The default is Pass H
69. counters Number of DL HARQ repetitions dlRetransHistogramOneRetrans dlRetransHistogramTwoRetrans dlRetransHistogramThreeRetrans dlRetransHistogramFourRetrans dlRetransHistogramOverFourRetrans DL HARQ ACK numbers Number of DL HARQ ACKs DL HARQ NACK numbers Number of DL HARQ NACKs DL successfully transferred Bursts Number of DL successfully transferred Bursts DL Drop bursts Number of DL dropped bursts UL HARQ repetition counters Number of UL HARQ retransmissions UL HARQ ACK numbers Number of UL HARQ ACKs UL HARQ NACK numbers Number of UL HARQ NACKs UL successfully transferred Bursts Number of UL successfully transferred Bursts UL Drop bursts Number of UL dropped bursts 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer BS Counters Groups 7 7 4 R6 Interface Counters R6 Interface counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs The available R6 Interface counters are Counter Name Description R6 Data path DL bytes counter R6 data path DL bytes R6 Data path UL bytes counter R6 data path UL bytes 7 7 5 Management NE Report Counters Management NE Report counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs The available Management NE Report counters are Counter Name Description Number of succeed initial network entries Number of succeed initial network entries Number of failed init
70. dking on a selected property name you can dd R to Wis fier Q Delak Gateway BH Figure 5 34 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 5 3 3 2 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template The Bearer parameter is Parameter Description Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway of the bearer interface of the BS Must be in the same subnet with the BS bearer IP Address ASNGW Pools Tab eeen anaw Pook authertication control Iratfic Qos Rules Bearer Traffic Qos ndes Mode Geste Updste Deise Fiters By cicking on a selected property name you can add Lo Ge fier 8S Load Balancing Pool 1 Ei LI 85 Load Balancing Pool 2 Di Figure 5 35 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ASNGW Pools Tab The ASNGW Pools parameters are Parameter Description BS Load Balancing Pool 1 Enable Disable the use of the Primary Pool The default is Enable The default in the device is Disable BS Load Balancing Pool 2 Enable Disable the use of the Secondary Pool The default is Enable The default in the device is Disable Pool 2 can be enabled only if Pool 1 is enabled and includes at least one entry 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 3 3 Authentication Tab Bss a d Bs L Redo Bese 7 Radio Advanced
71. downloaded software image that can be used to boot up the AU Current Running SW source The software that is currently running on the card operational or shadow Refer to Software Upgrade Task on page 298 for details on loading a new SW version and managing the SW versions 3 6 1 3 2 1 3 Maintenance Connectivity The Maintenance Connectivity section enables viewing configuring the parameters of the service interface used by the AU for uploading maintenance information to an external server 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Maintenance Connectivity section includes the following parameters Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the service interface Must be unique in the network The default is 192 168 0 1 Mask The subnet mask of the service interface The default is 255 255 255 0 Next Hop The IP address of the service interface s default gateway In Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS the default is 0 0 0 0 none In Micro Outdoor BTS Next Hop is read only and is set to the IP address of bearer interface s Default Gateway see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 55 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the service interface In Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS is read only The same VLAN ID is used by all service interfaces and is configured in the L1 L2 Connectivity page seer AU Maintenance VLAN ID on page 31 In Micro Ou
72. for 16 QAM 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 14 see 16 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 22 64 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 14 see 16 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 23 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ee D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description 64 QAM 2 3 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 7 see 64 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 25 64 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 7 see 64 QAM 2 3 parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 26 64 QAM 5 6 The C N in dB required for transmitting 64 QAM 5 6 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in th
73. for ACL 199 The maximum source port number of the application traffic from which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 65535 Destination IP Address Not applicable for ACL 199 The destination IP address to which to allow deny traffic The address 0 0 0 0 means any address The default is 0 0 0 0 Destination IP Mask Not applicable for ACL 199 The mask for the destination IP address allowing to define a range of source addresses subnet to which to allow deny traffic The default is 255 255 255 255 Minimum Destination Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The minimum destination port to which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 0 Maximum Destination Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The maximum destination port to which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 65535 Protocol Applicable only for an extended ACL The transport protocol for which traffic is allowed denied The range is 1 255 255 means any The default is 255 In ACL 199 the valid values are 6 TCP and 17 UDP Rule Action The rule action Allow or Drop The default is Allow Not applicable for ACL 199 where it is read only displaying QoS Mark Classifier ID Applicable only for ACL 199 The marking classifier ID to be used for associating an action ID that defines the DSCP and or Priority ma
74. gt The lowest supported frequency in GHz lt Frequency Max gt The highest supported frequency in GHz Description A read only description providing general details according to the Antenna Product Type The details include the antenna manufacturer number of ports polarization azymuth beamwidth if other than omni and gain EDT indicates support of Electrical Down Tilt 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual es amp Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Specification Electrical Down Tilt deg The downwards electrical tilt of the antenna in degrees The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 Installation Mechanical Down Tilt deg The downwards mechanical tilt of the antenna in degrees as opposed to the electrical tilt already integrated in the antenna and thus taken as reference instead of the horizontal plane The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 Heading deg The the azimuth angle in degrees between the center of the horizontal antenna beamwidth and the true north counting clockwise The range is from O to 359 Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 Cable Loss dB The attenuation in dB of the cable between the ODU port and antenna por
75. is from 1 to 100 The default is 1 the default in the device is 50 Rebind Time of Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The rebind interval as a percentage of the Lease Time This is passed to the MS DHCP client The range is from 1 to 99 This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The range is from 1 to 99 The default is 1 the default in the device is 75 Offer Reuse Time s Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The interval in seconds within which the MS should send a DHCP request to accept the address sent by the NPU If the MS does not accept the address within this period the MS is deregistered The range is from 1 to 120 The default is 1 second the default in the device is 5 Server Host Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The server host name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 64 characters The default is null Service Time w o IP Address Time of waiting for DHCP request when initial Data Path is established If expires MS should be deregistered The range is O to 86 400 seconds A value of 0 means this timer is deactivated and MS is not deregistered The default is 0 Vendor Class Identifier Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The option 60 str
76. is from O to 31 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsFeedbackZonePermBase Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The range is from O to 69 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsUIDataPermBase Not applicable in Automatic Mode Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The range is from O to 69 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsBearerlp BS Bearer IP Address The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS Must be unique in the managed network bsPagingGroupld Not applicable in Automatic Mode The Paging Group ID of the BS The range is from 0 to 65535 For proper operation all Paging Groups IDs in the radio network should be set either to 0 Idle Mode disabled or to unique numbers different Paging Group ID for each BS bsOfdmaDownlinkCenterFreq The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz End of BS definitions do not remove A mandatory line after the last BS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File 6 3 4 4 RADIUS NAS ID and ASN GW Bearer Interface Parameters RADIUS NAS ID and ASN GW Bearer Interface Parameters are applicable only for Network Elements operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology npuBootupMode asngwSta
77. is not allowed each pair must be unique NOTE If you delete all SNMP Managers you will loose the ability to manage the site using SNMP 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Cl Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Management Template 5 4 1 2 SNMP Trap Managers Tab Lag Managers SAME Trap Managers Mode Create G Updste Dekte ead x H Revert yA Retrash Sex Dene Kc Figure 5 40 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Trap Managers Tab The SNMP Trap Managers table includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry IP Address The IP address of the SNMP Trap Manager The SNMP Trap Manager Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the SNMP Trap Manager The default is 0 0 0 0 which is not a valid value the default in the device is 192 168 0 1 Port Number The port number on which the Trap Manager will listen for messages from the Agent The range is from 1 to 65535 The port on which the management system listens for traps is 162 The default is O which is not a valid value Community The name of the SNMP Read Community used by the Trap Manager Traps are sent toward those Managers for which this parameter is configured A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default in the d
78. of the ALRM IN connector s pins to alarms is Pin Number Alarm Number 3 and 15 1 4and 16 2 1 and 17 3 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 26 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Page Pin Number Alarm Number 6 and 18 4 7 and 19 5 8 and 20 6 9 and 21 7 10 and 22 8 3 4 2 2 Output Alarm Dry contact output alarms can be raised cleared by the user to notify an external device connected to the unit The Outputs Alarm table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Output Number The Output Alarm Number 1 3 Refer to the table below for details on the mapping of Output Alarm Numbers to pins in the ALRM OUT connector Name The name of the output alarm A descriptive string of up to 256 characters State Indicates the state of the output alarm On or Off Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the on and off options The default for all 3 Output Alarms is off The mapping of the ALRM OUT connector s pins to alarms is Pin Number Corresponding Alarm Number 1 FIX 2 N C 14 N O 1 11 FIX 12 N C 13 N O 2 23 FIX 24 N C 25 N O 3 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si Se E Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 3 5 Connectivity The Connectivity node includes five pages L1 L2 Connectivity Page Management Page ASN GW Beare
79. os Ca CR CeCe Os rr T yyy rI p e Aaaa F frs elei L feel At Dore Figure 3 3 Site View Page Macro Outdoor BTS with a 4 channels AU The components view is a graphical display of the BTS showing the installed components and their status Each of the installed modules NPU AUs is marked in a color according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component The following information and actions are available BW Double click on the NPU module to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 62 RB inan installed AU the background color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Card Properties on page 63 but is not installed the background color is orange If an AU is installed but not defined yet the background color is purple Double click on an installed or a required but not installed AU to open the configuration page for the selected AU refer to AU lt Type and Slot gt Page on page 67 E inan installed AU there are either four 4 channels AU or two 2 channels AU ODU connectors channels that are marked as follows Green The ODU port is Up no fault and the ODU port is set to No Shutdown Red The ODU port is Down fault or the ODU port is set to Shutdown M Double click on an empty AU module to open the New AU dialo
80. outer VLAN header of uplink Q in Q traffic The available values are 8100 88A8 9100 9200 The default is 8100 3 5 1 1 5 AU Maintenance VLAN ID Parameter Description AU Maintenance VLAN ID Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The service interface of the AU is used for uploading maintenance reports to an external server Most of the service interface parameters except the VLAN ID are configured separately for each AU see AU Card Properties Tab on page 67 The AU maintenance VLAN ID is the VLAN ID used by all AU service interfaces The available range is 1 9 11 100 110 4094 The default is 14 The AU Maintenance VLAN ID shall not conflict with other host interfaces VLAN IDs Bearer External Management Local Management any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID and any VID Map Range of a VPWS Mapped Service Group 3 5 1 1 6 Backhaul VLAN Translation The Backhaul VLAN Translation table lists the read only values of the default and current VLAN ID s used on the Backhaul Data port if the current value differs from the default Parameter Description VLAN ID The original default VLAN ID Must be a VLAN ID that is allowed on the port a Bearer VLAN ID the default is 11 b External Management VLAN ID Applicable only in In Band connectivity mode the default is 12 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D
81. refer to Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters on page 36 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D amp Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of bearer traffic The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 11 If the value is other than the default 11 it will be indicated in the Backhaul VLAN Translation table see Backhaul VLAN Translation on page 31 The Bearer interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other host interfaces VLAN IDs External Management Local Management AU Maintenance any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID and any VID Map Range of a VPWS Mapped Service Group Number of MS limitation The maximum number of active MSs that can be served by the device If this number is reached and a new MS attempts network entry it will be rejected and a suitable no resource alarm will be generated The range is from 1 to 3000 The default is 3000 Maximum ASN GW The maximum throughput in Mbps that can be provided by the device If Throughput this number is reached and a new MS attempts network entry it will be rejected and a suitable no resource alarm will be generated The range is from 1 to 500 Mbps The default is 500 Mbps Number of Active MS Read only The current number of active MSs served by the device Average UL DL bit rate via Re
82. remove the selected Neighboring Definitions from the relevant devices database upon the next run of the task in Custom mode Export Select to export details of selected entries to CSV file 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D God Chapter 8 Tasks Mutual Neighboring Task Operation Description Import Select to import correct neighbors data from CSV in the following form lt First_BS_ID gt lt Second_BS_ID gt lt Operation gt lt Operation gt Field can be Report Fix or Delete It can be ignored in which case Report operation will be used by default 8 7 3 The Mutual Neighboring Task Report Mutual Neighboring Completed with errors 5 6 2 lt gt 0 131 0 Report Completed Check 5 6 2 gt 0 131 0 Completed Check 0 131 0 gt 5 6 2 Completed 10 20 30 lt gt 35 3 7 Report Failed Check 10 20 30 gt 35 3 7 Completed Check 35 3 7 gt 10 20 30 Failed Failed Get on parameter bsIdIpMappingEntry instance 2294535 660510 10 20 30 lt gt 1 1 1 Report Failed Equipment not found Figure 8 11 Mutual Neighboring Task Report The report includes detailed results for all neighboring definitions including operation Report Fix or Delete and failure reason for failed operations 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D D 8 8 Chapter 8 Tasks Configuration History Backup and Aging Task Configuration History Backup and Agin
83. respectively GPS Status Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Indoor BTS using a Trimble Lassen GPS receiver 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D O 23 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description 1 PPS The status of External 1PPS clock OK or Failed 4 Sat amp more Not applicable if a GPS receiver is not connected Indicating whether 4 the minimum required for initial synchronization or more satellites are received by the GPS receiver OK or Failed 2 Sat amp more Not applicable if a GPS receiver is not connected Indicating whether 2 the minimum number required for maintaining synchronization or more satellites are received by the GPS receiver OK or Failed GPS Com Failure Not applicable if a GPS receiver is not connected Indicating the status of communication with the GPS receiver OK or Failed Hold Over Entered Indicating whether the device has entered into Hold Over state None or Started Hold Over T O Passed Indicating whether Hold Over Timeout has passed None or Passed BS Stopped to Transmit Indicating whether the BSs are transmitting or not OK Stopped 3 6 2 3 8 Software Versions Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Navigation Processor SW Version Read only The software version of the navigation processor of the GPS receiver if used Signal Processor SW
84. s The backup files include copies of all the applicable configuration data and databases in the managed device You can also retrieve Logging files from selected device s Logging files can later be exported to and used by an external application as part of a debugging procedure The device maintains up to the last three created configuration backup files Configuration backup files are created periodically by the NPU or upon a specific request to backup the current configuration When requesting a backup file you can either create and retrieve the current configuration or retrieve one of the previous backup configuration files available in the NPU _ To open the Backup Task Editor To open the Backup Task Editor do one of the following E In the Equipment Manager select one or several entries right click on the selected entries and select the Backup Configuration option The State of all selected devices must be Up The Backup Task Editor for a new task is displayed with the selected devices automatically included in the Source Equipment table BR In the Task Manager window do one of the following To open a new task use the Task Wizard To open an existing task select a Configuration Backup task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task s entry If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is opened displaying the status of the running task If the ta
85. tab includes the following sections E Inputs Alarm E Output Alarm 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D amp Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Page 3 4 2 1 Inputs Alarm Dry contact input alarms are external devices that are connected to the BTS unit and notify the system when there is a change in external conditions The Inputs Alarm table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Input Number The Input Alarm Number 1 8 Refer to the table below for details on the mapping of Input Alarm Numbers to pins in the ALRM IN connector Name The name of the input alarm Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the following options E Commercial Power Failure E Fire E Enclosure Door Open E High Temperature E Flood E Low Fuel H Low Battery Threshold E Generator Failure E Intrusion Detection E External Equipment Failure The default for all 8 Input Alarms is External Equipment Failure Send Alarm Defines the contacts condition for activating the alarm Close or Open The default for all 8 Input Alarms is Closed Blocking Indicates whether or not blocking is applied for the input alarm yes or no If blocking is applied alarm will not be generated regardless of the status of the input Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the yes and no options The default for all 8 Input Alarms is no The mapping
86. table INFORMATION Download to Shadow action will be skipped if the target device is running from the Shadow version or if the specified file already exists in the device as either Shadow or Operational y Set as Operational Version action will be skipped if the target device is running from the Operational version 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task 8 4 3 AU Software Upgrade applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Task Name software upgrade Software Download Activity AU Software Upgrade EI Software Upgrade Settings Other Settings L Download To Shadow L Delete AU version From NPU L Switch Over File Name v TFTP IP Address 10 10 187 116 Select Equipment BTS Name Site IP AU Slot No AU Opera AU Shadow AU Curre EMS 2 10 10 14 16e Macr 10 10 14 Figure 8 7 Software Upgrade Task Editor AU Software Upgrade INFORMATION AUs should be upgraded only after successful completion of upgrading the relevant NPU s The Software Upgrade Settings section comprises the following action options when AU Software Upgrade is selected 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual e D amp Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Parameter Description Download to Shadow Loads the upgrade file selected in the File Name selection field below to the Shadow memory of the applicable AU s
87. the Almanac time is valid when the GPS is reset The range is from O to 4320 The default is 720 Hot Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Parameter Description Ephemeris Usable Time The maximum period in hours for which the Ephemeris time is valid when the GPS is reset The range is from 0 to 168 The default is 4 Synchronization Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Maximum Number of Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS When a GPS receiver is Satellites for Sync Loss used this is the minimum number of received satellites required for maintaining synchronization The range is from 0 to 11 Must be lower than Minimum Number of Satellites for Sync Return The default is 1 Minimum Number of Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS When a GPS receiver is Satellites for Sync Return used this is the minimum number of received satellites required for the GPS to re synchronize so that the unit can terminate holdover state The range is from 1 to 12 Must be higher than Maximum Number of Satellites for Sync Loss The default is 2 Number of Satellites Read only The number of satellites currently acquired by the GPS Note In a Micro Outdoor BTS using a GPS receiver the Maximum Number of Satellites for Sync Loss and Minimum Number of Satellites for Sync Return parameters are not configurable and are hard coded to 1 and
88. the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified H BS parameters for each BS in Macro Micro BTS The BS parameters section may be repeated as needed according to the number of BSs BR ASN GW Bearer Interface parameters and Radius NAS ID in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology H External Bearer VLAN in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and in devices operting in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology with Unified Connectivity Mode M Service Interface parameters for each Service Interface in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology The Service Interface parameters section may be repeated as needed according to the number of Service Interfaces M Service Group parameters for each IP Service Group in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology The Service Group parameters section may be repeated as needed according to the number of Service Groups The site configuration will use the order of BSs if applicable as they appear in the excel file as the order of BSs in the sector association table The same number of BSs must be configured for all sites in the file Similar rules apply to Service Interfaces and Service Groups if applicable Defined Service Interface parameters must be according to the Type of the relevant Service Interface according to the order in the golden site configuration file Defined IP Service Group parameters must be according to the DHCP Function Mode of the relevant Service Group according to the order in the golden site configuration f
89. the following buttons Button Description Add Classifier Adds a new entry to the QoS Marking Classifiers table 3 5 2 3 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Button Description Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the QoS Marking Classifiers table A Classifier ID referenced in an ACL Rule see ACL Parameters Section on page 45 cannot be deleted By default Classifier IDs 1 8 are pre configured associated with Action IDs 1 8 respectively The default pre configured classifiers cannot be deleted or modified For more details on the default use of these classifiers refer to ACL Tab on page 40 Refer to Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters on page 36 for details on the effect of changes in the DSCP and or 802 1P Priority of one of the NPU IP interfaces on the QoS marking rules ACL Tab The ACL tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTSs The ACL tab enables managing Access Control Lists ACLs ACLs are applied on traffic received from the DATA MGMT or CSCD ports and destined towards the NPU and not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW the AUs By default all traffic destined towards the AUs or ASN GW is denied You can configure ACLs for allowing or dropping traffic destined towards the ASN GW and or All AUs that meets certain criteria You can create the following types of ACLs M Standard ACL
90. the following sections 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual QO Gel Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity E ACL Table HM ACL Parameters Section 3 5 2 3 1 ACL Table The ACL table includes the following parameters for each ACL Parameter Description ACL Number The ACL number ACL 1 99 are Standard ACLs ACL 100 198 are Extended ACLs ACL 199 is the default extended ACL that is pre configured in the system and is not attached to any interface ACL 199 is reserved for QoS marking rules You cannot configure Allow Deny rules for ACL 199 ACL Name The name of the ACL The default name is the ACL Number ACL Active State The state of the ACL Activate or Deactivate The default is Deactivate A new ACL can be created only with Active State Deactivated Rule s parameters can be modified only if the state of the ACL is Deactivated If ACL Applicable Interface is None its state cannot be set to Activate excluding ACL 199 ACL Applicable Interface The interface s to which the ACL applies None ASN GW All AU ASN GW amp All AU In Mini Centralized ASN GW only the None and ASN GW options are applicable In a Macro BTS operating in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology only the None and All AU options are applicable The default is ASN GW The ACL table section also includes the following buttons Button Description Add ACL Adds a new ACL entry to the table Delete De
91. the pool 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gel Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity ASN GW Pools ASN GW Primary Pool ASN GW Secondary Pool ASN GW IP Address 66 3 3 i 22 2 11 10 106 125 82 KR EERI k EK Lo Batre v m Dore cl Figure 3 19 ASN GW Pools Page The ASN GW Pools page includes two tables for the ASN GW Primary and Secondary Pools Each Pool can contain up to 10 ASN GW IP Addresses Use the Add Delete buttons below each table to add delete entries to from the table IP addresses must be unique in the tables An IP address that exists in one of the tables cannot be added to either the same or the other table Note that you cannot populate the Secondary Pool if the Primary Pool is empty 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 1 1 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Equipment The Equipment node includes two sub nodes E Shelf E External Shelf The Shelf sub node enables access to the following pages M Power Supply Page applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS H NPU Page not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS M AU Node not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW with AU lt Type and Slot gt Page for each of the existing created AU entities Power Supply Page The Power Supply page is applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS The Power Supply page enables viewing de
92. the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license Information in this document is subject to change without notice Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the product specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute a binding offer for the sale of the product described herein 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual About This Manual About This Manual This manual describes how to use AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT Device Driver Version 3 2 for managing 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW equipment running SW Versions 3 0 20 NPU and AU using NMS Infrastructure Version 5 0 This manual is intended for personnel responsible for managing the equipment system using the AlvariSTAR Element Management System and or the AlvariCRAFT Local CRAFT Utility It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the operation and use of Al
93. this fiter W AU Slot Number o Jo G Porti Potz O Ports O Ports lt s KIKK E Figure 5 47 The Equipment Template Shelf Page Shutdown Power AU to ODU Tab Macro BTS The Shutdown Power AU to ODU table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description ld The automatically generated index number of the entry AU Slot Number The AU Slot Number 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Equipment Template The Shutdown Power AU to ODU Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description AU Slot Number The slot number of the AU 1 4 7 9 for Macro BTS slot number 4 is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS 1 for Micro BTS The default is O which is not a valid slot number Port 1 4 The type of operation to be performed Shutdown shutdown power Rx Only or No Shutdown normal operation The default is Shutdown The Ports 3 and 4 are not ee default in the device is No Shutdown applicable for a 2 ports AU and for Micro Outdoor BTS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard In This Chapter Introduction on page 252 7 Golden Site Configuration Backup File on page 253 Excel File on page 254 Using the Mass Configuration Wizard on page 267 6
94. value of the IP protocol The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Protocol Relevant only if Enable IP Protocol is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Protocol is enabled The enabled protocol number Value is in the range 1 255 using standard IANA protocol values The default is 1 Cannot be updated in an existing rule Enable IP Source Classifier Indicates whether the use of an associated IP source address is enabled for the classification rule The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Source Address Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The IP source address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 must be set to a valid value Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Source Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP source addresses The default is 255 255 255 255 Cannot be updated in an existing rule Enable IP Destination Classifier Indicates whether the use of an associated destination address is enabled for the classification rule The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Destination Address Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled Configurable only when
95. with Reuse 3 E if Segment Number see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab on page 132 is 0 then only bits 0 and 1 should be set checked E if Segment Number is 1 then only bits 2 and 3 should be set checked E if Segment Number is 2 then only bits 4 and 5 should be set checked The default is all bits unchecked Basic Map Repetition The basic repetition used in the transmission of the maps using QPSK 1 2 The available options are 1 2 4 and 6 1 means no repetitions The default is 6 Frame Structure Mode DL Diversity Mode The downlink diversity mode used by the system Matrix A B or Beam Forming The Beam Forming option is not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS The default is Matrix A B Beam Forming is a licensed feature You will be prompted to enter the required password for activating Beam Forming mode 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Neighbor Beam Forming Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor units operating in MIMO Matrix A B mode The beam forming mechanism is based on symmetry in performance between uplink and down link To compensate for possible differences due to HW of the ODU a special low level calibration signal is transmitted periodically in each link During the time this calibration signal is transmitted all othe
96. wm folder may need to be manually created When working under UNIX refer to the instructions in opt lt NMS name gt firmware wm The system will automatically identify the files and use the correct file for each device type You may define a different station as the TFTP server to be used In this case the software file s to be used should be available in the root Otherwise you should specify the full path and file name INFORMATION The file name and format should not be changed To open the Software Upgrade Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following M To open a new task use the Task Wizard E To open an existing task select a Software Upgrade task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task entry If the task is Active the Runtime Results window is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Software Upgrade Task Editor for the task is displayed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Software Upgrade Task Task Name Upgrade1 Software Download Activity BTS Software Upgrade Software Upgrade Settings Download To Shadow Reboot From Shadow LI Set As Operational Version File Name npu_3_0_20_38 tgz TFTP IP Address 10 10 144 1 Select Equipment Region BTS Name BTS Nu Site IP NPU Op NPU Sha NPU Cur
97. 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface Subnet Mask Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Mandary for Create Mode of a VLAN service interface The subnet mask of the default gateway Should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface the default in the device is 255 255 255 0 Encapsulation Type Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VPLS Trunk service interfaces The encapsulation mode of applicable traffic VLAN or Stacked VLAN QinQ The default is VLAN 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Outer VLAN ID Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VPLS Trunk service interfaces if EncapsualationType is set to Stacked VLAN The Service Interface Outer VLAN ID A Service Interface Outer VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of a VPW
98. 1 09 22 Group i Instance I Parameter Operation Changed From ChangedTo 1 ChangedBy Changed At Configuration Section Al ACL Table 98 k D I a k SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Do To Section ACL Table 186 gt DEL e a SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Do To Section ACL Table ACL Name MOD 1 SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Die Te Section ACL Table ACL Applicable Interfaces 00 00 40 00 00 00 40 00 SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Do To Section ACL Table ACL Active State Activate SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Eco To Section ACL Table ACL Name 199 SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Do To Section ACL Table ACL Applicable Interfaces 00 00 00 00 SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Dip To Section ACL Table ACL Active State Activate SYSTEM 15 53 23 2011 09 21 Do To Section WmBckhiPort lanTranslationEnbl kb r k SYSTEM 12 58 19 2011 09 21 D Go To Section AAA Access E 3 12 58 19 2011 09 21 Do To Section Marking Actions 12 58 19 2011 09 21 J Go To Section Marking Actions 12 58 19 2011 09 21 Go To Section Marking Actions 12 58 19 2011 09 21 EJ Go To Section Marking Actions 12 58 19 2011 09 21 E Go To Section Marking Actions k 12 58 19 2011 09 21 Do To Section Marking Actions DSCP amp Priority 15 53 22 2011 09 21 EJ Go To Section Marking Actions DSCP amp Priority 15 53 22 2011 09 21 Die To Section Marking Actions DSCP amp Priority 15 53 22 2011 09 21 E Go To Section Marking Actions DSCP amp Priority 15 53 22 2011 09 21 E Go To
99. 1 General Service Profile Parameters The General Service Profile parameters at the top of the page are Parameter Description Name The read only name of the service profile Profile Status Indicates whether the profile is enabled or disabled 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 7 5 3 2 2 3 7 5 3 2 3 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Service Flow Table Service flows are unidirectional stream of packets either in the downlink or uplink direction associated with a certain set of QoS requirements such as maximum latency and minimum rate Based on certain classification rules service flows are transported over the R1 air interface in 802 16e connections identified by connection IDs and identified by GRE keys over the R6 interface in GRE tunnels In addition the ASN GW can mark outgoing traffic in the R3 interface for further QoS processing within the CSN The system supports two types of service flows according to the convergence sublayer CS type IP CS and VLAN CS An IP CS service flow can be associated only with an IP service group A VLAN CS service flow can be associated only with a VPWS Transparent QinQ Mapped service group VLAN CS service flows can be configured only for the Default Service Profile Up to 12 Service Flows can be defined for each Service Profile The Service Flow table includes the following read only parameters for each service flow of the service profile Paramete
100. 2 18 3 8 2 1 4 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab The Mobility tab enables defining the deployment mode and the handover negotiation parameters It also enables defining ID IP mapping of neighbor BSs Basic 255 243 41 2 6 25 General Air Frame Structure General Air Frame Structure Zones Indie Deployment Deployment Fix v Triggers Type eae Action Neighbor Own CINR lt dB E Scan request General Delete Trigger Neighbor List BS Neighbor ID IP Address BTS Name BTS Number Action On Selected Neighbors 255 243 41 2 6 35 192 168 198 11 Site 198 255 243 41 35 3 6 192 168 198 3 d 1983 255 243 41 35 3 7 192 168 198 3 3 0 1983 Delete 255 243 41 3 3 3 192 168 198 1 1981 Upd Upda Add Entry Figure 3 45 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si 3 8 2 1 4 1 3 8 2 1 4 2 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS The Mobility tab includes the following sections E Deployment E Triggers E Neighbor List Deployment The Deployment section includes the Deployment parameter Parameter Description Deployment The type of deployment in the area served by the BS Fix or Mobile To support proper handover should be set to Fix only if mobile MSs are not expected The default is Fix Triggers The Triggers table includes the following parameters for each entry
101. 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 M 3402 5 to 35797 5 in steps of 0 125 See also note below regarding dependency on configured Bandwidth Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map Major Groups see below used for the FDC transmission Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The range is from O to 15 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Map Major Groups 6 bits representing the selection of Map Major Groups 0 to 5 where the left most bit MSB represents Major Group 5 If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out Bits 0 2 and 4 must be set checked Configure 111111 If BW 7 10 MHz with reuse 1 all bits 0 to 5 must be set checked Configure 111111 For BW 7 10 MHz with R
102. 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description IP Source Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP source addresses The default is 0 0 0 0 the default in the device is 255 255 255 255 If selected must be set to a valid value Enable IP Source Classifier Indicates whether the use of an associated IP source address is enabled for the classification rule The default is no 5 2 4 6 Classification Rule Destination Address Tab SFA Config J Grp Rules Classification Config Classification Ruin Protocol Chssfication Rude Source Address Classification Fike Oesinntion Address Classification Rute Source Port cl lt gt Mode Crome ede Delete Fal D Revert VY eersten Config name HEES W Classification SE in LI TP Destination Address DBP Dettinsbon mas LU Enable IP Destination Classtier v ce Retreat Save bene Figure 5 13 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Address Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Destination Address tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Source Destination parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Destination Address table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id
103. 5 213 and 3 0 5 Macro BTS and Macro BTS ODU operating in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology Transparent Mode E SW Version 3 0 10 and 3 0 20 All Network Elements 6 4 2 6 4 3 Mass Configuration Wizard Common Parameters Click Next to imort the selected common parameters file The next step will become available only if a usable file is selected Mass Configuration Wizard Import Unique Parameters File 1 Use the Select File button to open the Open window allowing you to browse to the location of the pre prepared Excel file Select the required Excel file and click Open A Click Next If the number of BSs defined for each site in the Excel file does not match the number of BSs in the selected common parameters golden backup file an error message indicating the mismatch will be displayed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Using the Mass Configuration Wizard Site Site 1 Number of fully configured BS mismatch between backup file 2 and unique file 1 Figure 6 4 Mass Configuration Wizard Number of BSs Mismatch Message 3 If there are any detectable configuration errors in the file such as if a parameter that should be unique appears more than once or a non valid value an Invalid Unique Parameters window will be displayed indicating the detected errors bsPagingGroupId Parameter bsPagingGroupId should have unique values but the value 9
104. ASN GW DD User Manual D d Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Configuring Templates used for filtering by selecting the parameter s clicking on each parameter name that will change to italics font blue color and configuring the filtering value The selected criteria name and filtering value for each filtering parameter will be displayed in the Filters area Only entries that match all filtering criteria will be deleted NOTE If you do not select any filters all rows of the table in the target devices will be deleted excluding default pre configured entries in certain tables that cannot be deleted 5 1 3 After completing configuration of filters for the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The color of the new row will change to black As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table The row will be colored red Actual deletion will take effect after clicking on the Save button Note that there are some dependencies among certain tables that should be taken into account when designing Delete Mode templates For example if you want to delete a certain Service Interface that in a target device is associated with an existing Service Group you must first delete th
105. Antenna Page Changed to reflect the use of the new Antenna Product Type parameter Added Information read only field updated description of Description and Number of Ports Updated ranges for Longitude and Latitude Up to a maximum of 24 antennas can be defined for an Outdoor BTS August 2009 AAA Page Updated structure Accounting Authentication UDP Port parameters removed AAA Name added August 2009 Qos Marking Page Updated range for QoS Marking Rule Name and Service Flow Media Flow Type Marking Rule Name must be unique in the device Added description of functionality of the feature August 2009 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Service Group Page Service Interface Changed Tunnel MTU Size to MTU Size August 2009 Tab Updated description of Default Gateway IP Address Added Subnet Mask Updated value range for Service Interface Name 1 30 characters Added general description of service interfaces Updated description of Tunnel Destination IP Service Group Page Service Groups Changed Client Class Identifier to Vendor August 2009 Tab Class Identifier Added Secondary DNS Server Added Service group deletion rule related to VLAN Service Interface Updated value range for Service Group Name 1 30 characters Added VPWS Mapped option to Service Group Type Updated
106. BS support RCID When enabled CIDs of either 7 or 11 bits will be dynamically used according to the current number of MS served at each given moment The RCID Usage defines whether RCID is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from O to 31 The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Basic Rate for The downlink basic rate for unicast and broadcast management Manedement QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Basic Rate for Data The downlink basic rate for data QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The valid range is from O to 69 The default is 0 Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The valid range is from O to 69 The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 37 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS
107. Bearer External Management Internal Management and Local Management Add Excluded IP Address Applicable only in Server mode Enables you to add an IP address to the Excluded IP address List see below To add an IP address enter it in the text box and click on the Add button The default added address is 0 0 0 0 Excluded IP Address List Applicable only in Server mode The list of IP addresses that are to be excluded from the address pool The list can contain up to 16384 IP addresses To remove one or several IP addresses from the list select the addresses to be removed and click on the Delete button 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Subnet Mask Applicable only in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the subnet mask to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the IP address of the Default Gateway to be provided by the local DHCP Server with the device IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Address Allocation Timeout Renewal Time The interval as a percentage of the Lease Time after which the MS can
108. CII Agent Subscriber ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box Client Boot File Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The client boot file name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 128 characters The default is null VLAN ID Applicable only for VPLS Service Groups The own VLAN ID of the Service Group The range is 0 4094 O means untagged The default is O Different VPLS Service Groups may have the sane value of their own VLAN ID including multiple VLAN untagged VPLS Service Groups Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts Not applicable for service flows with UGS uplink data delivery type The range is 0 7 The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual e amp Fe Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Maximum Latency msec The maximum latency in ms allowed in the downlink service flow used for multicasts Applicable only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR The range is 0 4 294 967 295 msec The default is 0 The default in the device is 500 msec Media Flow Type An opti
109. Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer ASN GW Counters Groups Counter Name Counts the Number of Accounting Start Requests Number of radius accounting start messages Transmitted Accounting Stop Requests Number of radius accounting stop messages Transmitted Accounting Interim Requests Number of radius accounting interim messages Transmitted Accounting Responses Accepted Accounting Responses Accounting Packets Dropped Dropped Accounting Responses Authentication Access Requests started Authentication Access Requests started Authentication Access Requests stopped Authentication Access Requests stopped Authentication Access Interim Requests Authentication Access Interim Requests Authentication Packets Dropped Authentication Packets Dropped Calculation formula Radius Access Challenge Dropped Radius Access Accept Dropped Radius Access Reject Dropped Authentication Pending Requests Authentication Pending Requests Calculation formula radAccessStartReqTx radAccessStopReqIx Authentication Round Trip Delay Authentication Round Trip Delay Calculation formula Sum all timing between all radAccessReqTx and radAccessAcceptRx during 15min Sum of Events not responded events will be discarded from this counter result Accounting Open Sessions Accounting Open Sessions Calculation formula Accounting Start Requests Accounting St
110. Classficaton Rule source Address Clsssfication Rule Destination Adsess Classtication Rule source Port JO D Mode Create d Deise ZA IX P Revert d Classtication Contig Nane id Sefer Cty tome S O PPro C Enable IP Protocol D Luz Refresh Sue done Figure 5 11 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Protocol Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Protocol tab is applicable only for L3 rules The IP Protocol parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Protocol table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Protocol Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects IP Protocol Relevant only if Enable IP Protocol is enabled The enabled protocol number Value is in the range 1 255 using standard IANA protocol values The default is 1 Enable IP Protocol Indicates whether the packet is classified based on the value of the IP protocol yes or no The default is no 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ei D Chapter 5 Configuring Templ
111. Communities configured as an Authorized Manager in the device To define an Authorized Manager select BTS gt Management gt Authorized Managers gt add You will be prompted to define the following parameters for each manager Manager Number a unique number from 1 to 5 Community Read Only Community Read amp Write At this stage it is recommended to also define the management station as a Trap Manager Select BTS gt Management gt SNMP Traps Managers gt add You will be prompted to define the following parameters for each manager IP Address the IP address of the EMS station Port Number the port number on which the Trap Manager will listen for messages from the agent The port on which the management system listens for traps is 162 Community the name of the SNMP Read Community used by the Trap Manager Enable Traps Distribution select enable to enable sending traps to the management station 6 Applying the Configuration To apply the changes reset the unit select BTS gt Unit Control gt Shutdown operation gt updateParam and select the reset option After the unit reboots it should be manageable from remote by the EMS station At this point you may configure additional parameters required for activating the unit using either a management system or continue using the Monitor program 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 2 Using the Equipment Manager In This Chapter mM The E
112. DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description BTS Name Read only The name of the Neighbor BS site BTS Number Read only The BTS Name Site ID of the Neighbor BS site The Neighbor List also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Entry Opens the BS Selector window that enables selection of one or several new candidate neighbors The selected neighbors appears in the neighbor list however the new neighbors are not actually added until the Add Neighboring Task is executed For each new entry in the list you should define the IP Address of the neighbor BS ID IP mapping Action on Selected Neighbors Add Opens the Add Neighboring Task that allows adding the selected BS s to the neighbor list of the current BS and adding the BS to the neighbor lists of selected BSs Delete Opens the Delete Neighboring Task that allows deleting the selected BS s and their details from the neighbor list of the current BS and deleting the current BS and its details from the neighbor lists of selected BSs Update Opens the Update Neighboring Task that allows getting an update from the selected Neighbor BSs regarding their current parameters values and sending updates to Neighbor BSs The Neighboring Task displays the neighboring BSs that will participate in a one time task according to the selected operation enabling to remove selected BSs f
113. EE Almanac Usable Time 720 h Latitude oo 000 IN x deg Hotstart Altitude 0 m Ephemeris Usable Time 4 h Synchronization Maximum Number of Satellites for Sync Loss 1 Number of Satellites lt gt gt Minimum Number of Satellites for Syne Return 2 GPS Status Iw eo L ngeal Liv anni Done Figure 3 28 GPS Page Macro Indoor BTS The GPS page includes the following sections Chain BS Clock Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Location Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Warm Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Hot Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Synchronization Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW GPS Status Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Indoor BTS using a Trimble Lassen GPS receiver Software Versions Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW RB SNTP Primary Secondary Server Applicable only for Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Si 3 6 2 3 1 Chain Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description GPS Type The type of time synchronization source to be used The currently available options are E None No external time synchronization source E Trimble Acutime Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Timing GPS OGR model of outdoor GPS receiver
114. Editor HM Managing Tables and Template Modes WR Updating Scalars 5 1 1 The Template Configuration Editor The Template Configuration Editor enables managing the parameters included in the selected template There are two types of parameters Scalars a single instance in each managed object and tables that may contain multiple rows multiple instances of the relevant parameters in each managed object Each template tab can include either only scalars or a single table NOTE A e The default values specified for different parameters are the default values in the device Certain default tl values used by the templates may differ from the specified default values iD bs 3 5 H Let D O Rado Advanced C RERO Bearer interface General DeF LRF J Sase Band J Ar Frame Structure Triggees I Mode exe Update cete Piters By added on a selected property name you can add amp to this fier O Bee Rate Basic Rate for Management LJ Deployment O Basc Rate for Des SlIRIRK KIKI EK O Maimam Sub Burst Mode LI Logay ASN GW Made L tsclL es Figure 5 1 The Template Configuration Editor Tab with Scalar Parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D di Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Configuring Templates EI snow 25 8 FE CS ASW SE DEN O Qos Melen O Fa Service Prolls Service Irkerfaces service Groupe C Hot Uning Mode Crete GQUpdte Deste ba Sr
115. Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The IP destination address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 Cannot be updated in an existing rule 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description IP Destination Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP destination addresses The default is 255 255 255 255 Cannot be updated in an existing rule Layer 4 applicable only for L3 rules Enable TCP UDP Source Indicates whether the use of a range of source ports is enabled for the Port classification rule The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule If enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be either 6 TCP or 17 UDP TCP UDP Source Port Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled Configurable only when Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled The range of values From To of the source ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 65535 Cannot be updated in an existing rule Enable TCP UDP Indicates whether the use of a range of destination ports is enabled for Destination Port the classification rule The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rul
116. I Agent Circuit ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Agent Remote ID and Binary ASCIl Agent Remote ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Sub option 2 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Remote ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Remote ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCIl Agent Remote ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box Agent Subscriber ID and Binary ASCIl Agent Subscriber ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Sub option 6 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Subscriber ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Subscriber ID enter the ID string in the Binary AS
117. In Band or Out of Band The file structure supports only Automatic configuration of relevant BS parameters All parameters that can be configured automatically are not included in the file The file structure supports automatic calculation of BS ID LSB based on serviceZone cellSiteld and Sectorld For automatic calculation the entry for bsldLsb should include the relevant formula in the above example the formula for B10 should be B13 B12 256 B11 32 256 The formula for B19 should be B22 B21 256 B120 32 256 Alternatively you may configure it manually in which case serviceZone cellSiteld and Sectorld are ignored 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D O Gei Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File 6 3 5 3 Example 3 Site 1 Configuration EE ea eT a ERR General Site 3 IsteNene Parameters 4 Main Stree SE radiusNasid 55 255 0 0 10 externalBearerVian External Bearer Tan deit ASN GW Bearer Interface Parameters RADIUS NAS ID amp NPR Pi 8 Kn o gt Eeis ko VLAN 12 servicelfDescr IP A 14 servicelfDescr Ana SI 1 Service 15 servicelfVianid HS Interfaces 16 servicelfDescr SSCL SLT 17 serviceltViend _ M5 ooo Parameters 18 serviceltOftGwip 90 sd D rowa kees 22 dhepSrvipPoolNetAdar 566 2 23 dhepSrvipPoolMaxAddr 5669 si Service Groups 26 dhepSrvExcludelpAdar 5639 Parameters 28 dhopOwnlpAddr dD 29 extDhcpSrvipAddr 31 dhepSrvi
118. K e cat we P COMA EI 3 gxi 6 QPSK 34 E 16 QaM US EI 16 QAM 3 4 EI 64 QAM 1 2 64 Q0M 2 3 E 64 Q0M 3 4 EI s QAM SIS e lo 17 Seel e m Dos cl Figure 3 50 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Target Noise amp Interference Level Target NI The target noise and interference level for the PUSC zone in dBm The range is from 130 to 110 in steps of 1 dBm The default is 127 Level Allowed Interference Correction of maximum allowed UL MCS based on measured DL CINR The options are Very High High Medium Low The default is High Beam Forming 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Calibration Attenuator Not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS Applicable only for Beam Forming DL Diversity Mode The calibration attenuation used to help mitigate potential out of band interference to beam forming calibration caused by other base stations The options are No Attenuation Low Attenuation High Attenuation The default is Low Attenuation Required C N Levels Read Only ACK The C N in dB required for sending ACK reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB The default is 12 CO The C N in dB required for sen
119. LAN ID parameter for VLAN service interface SVID for QinQ service interface The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 The default is O which is not a valid value must be set to a valid value other than the default A Service Interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of a VPWS Mapped Service Group servicelfOuterVlanlid Applicable only for VPLS Trunk service interfaces if EncapsualationType is set to Stacked VLAN The Service Interface Outer VLAN ID The range is 1 4094 The default value is O and it must be replaced by a valid value A Service Interface Outer VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of a VPWS Mapped Service Group 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File Parameter Name in File Description servicelfDfltGwip Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface
120. Line The type of equipment from which to collect data Read only in the current version Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created Note that when using the Task Wizard the default task name automatically replaces the name selected in the first Create New Task step Description An optional brief description of the task 8 1 2 Entities Tab The Entities tab enables the selection of existing entities for performance collection 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gd Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task Performance Collection General Entities Actions 4Motion BTS 233 npu_2_5 10 10 14 Up Giele Es Ei size Figure 8 2 Performance Collection Task Editor Entities Tab The Entities tab includes the following controls Parameter Description Add Opens the Equipment Selection window with the list of available devices allowing you to select the device s to be added to the task Remove Removes selected entities from the list The following information is displayed for each entity in the list Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system Name The name of the device as configured in the device Type The type of devi
121. Lu pe LO Regen BTS harbor ETS Name TE Type er SW Version Fic None Fete EH Sas Rl am testi aM Macro UTS 192 160 200 2 2 0 10 10 ILOG mig SM bun Ot Cg O92 Normal 23 testi 48 Macro BTS 192 168 2003 30 10 10 ET am tiup Ot g 200s oral 2004 ET 4M Macro BTS 192 168 2004 30 10 10 2011051911 43 Wang 1 Se 19 4M Macro BTS 1R168 198 3 0 10 9 20110519 11 25 Noma 2002 oat 4M Macro BTS 192 160 2002 3 0 10 9 DUR 11 29 Normal 2004 testervecbewer amaro ors 192 140 200 4 2 0 10 10 1 mooted 1 saei 48 Macro BTS 192 168 198 11 3 0 10 9 z m thas Olde Chg nams 1909 4M Maro BTS COU 192 168 1989 3 0 10 126 gM the Crt Og 2011 05 Normal 1 4M Moro BTS COU 192 160 190 9 20 10 12 sM tiup Ot Gg 2011 05 19 11 54 Normal 1 Ste 190 4M Macro bts 192 160 698 81 20110519113kog ge 4M bhp Loggng DER UL Normal w tesi 4M Macro OTS 190 100 200 2 3 0 10 10 DUGG Mbao Ot Og 2011 0519 11 94 Norna 7003 testi an Macro BTS 192 168 200 3 30 10 10 1105150519 am than Ot Chg 2011 05 19 11 58 Nams M Renas on paga 12 Tas 12 re rgee lz FEH TER aiid oe 5 tatinog Server 192 168 10 150 User bier Figure 9 1 BTS File Manager 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D g Chapter 9 The File Manager The File Manager You can use the Criteria Select Filters for viewing only files that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed files are Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment
122. MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS M Radio Basic Page M Radio Advanced Page 3 8 2 1 Radio Basic Page The Radio node s Basic page includes the following tabs M Radio Basic Page General Tab M Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab M Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab M Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab 3 8 2 1 1 Radio Basic Page General Tab The General Tab enables defining the basic radio parameters ffline on 1 Basic 0 0 2 55 55 55 Genera Ar Frame structure Gereral Ar Frame Structure Zones Mobity Name P te ffe B5 Identification Operates 10 0 02 esmis 55 55 55 Radio Parameters es Bandwachh 5 r me Corker frequency Aan bp Idle Mode D table Paongo ID D EI Lo Batre w doei Dore Figure 3 42 Radio Basic Page General Tab The General tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name of the BS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 printable characters BS Identification 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual OQ Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Operator ID Read only The unique operator identifier The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs throughout the radio access network BS ID LSB Read only The unique ID of the BS This ID must be unique wit
123. Manager Multiple Configuration Can be opened also from the Template March 2010 Task Manager New Preview Only option Duplicate Site Manager Updated to reflect support for all Macro BTS June 2010 devices Indoor Outdoor and Mini Centralized ASN GW Updated order of screens in the process of new site creation Managing a Single Device Service Group Page Service Flow Parameters Editor Template Manager The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab Updated range for Media Flow Type up to 15 SW Version 3 0 10 December 2010 Managing a Single Device AU Slot Page Control Tab Updated options for Shutdown Power AU to ODU Radio Added Rx Only option SW Version 3 0 10 December 2010 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Managing a Single Device R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab Template Manager The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ASNGW Pools Tab Updated configuration rule for enabling the Secondary Pool Pool2 SW Version 3 0 10 December 2010 Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab Template Manager The BS Template General Def Tab New parameter Maximum Sub Burst Mode SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 The Performance Monitoring Viewer Updated to reflect modified functionality SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Software Upgrade Task
124. Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Interim Interval Not applicable if Accounting Mode see above is set to None The default interval in seconds for Accounting Interim reports to be used if Acct Interim Interval is not received from the AAA server Value 07 means interim reports are deactivated unless Acct Interim Interval is sent by the AAA server in Access Accept messages The valid range is O none or 5 1600 minutes The default is 5 The DHCP Function Editor for Server and Proxy modes includes the following parameters Parameter Description Address Configuration Primary DNS Server IP Address of the first DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group The default is 0 0 0 0 In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Secondary DNS Server IP Address of the second DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group The default is 0 0 0 0 In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept IP Address Pool Applicable only in Server mode The range of IP addresses in the address pool From To The defaults are From 0 0 0 0 To 255 255 255 255 DHCP IP addresses in the pool shall not overlap with the DHCP address pool defined in an existing service group and with IP addresses of host interfaces
125. N 270 7 1 The Performance Monitoring Viewer 0 ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 271 7 2 The Counters Group Selection SGechon ENER EN ENNEN REENEN 273 7 3 The Counters Selection Section s ss sssssssusunnnnunnunnunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm 274 7 4 The Graph and Graph Controls SGecthon EE ENEE ENEE EEN 276 7 5 General CONEGIS eegene bereet EENEG 277 7 6 ASN GW Counters e nnnm 278 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Q Contents 7 6 1 AAA COUNTESS NENNEN ENEE 278 7 6 2 Bearer Interface COU EE 280 7 6 3 Management Provisioned QoS COUNTESS E 280 7 6 4 Management Initial NE COuUnterS ssssssssssnssunrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnee 281 7 6 5 Management Service flows Counters NEEN RENE 281 7 6 6 Load Balancing COU egene 282 7 6 7 R6 Interface Total Counters s ssssssssssesssnnsnnnnrnrrnrrnnnnnnnnnntrnnnnnnnnnne nen nnnenn det 282 7 6 8 R3 la E ele 282 7 6 9 r Interface BS Counter Sericini A E 283 7 7 BS Co nters Groups se ccciciseiseescaaie dec ecteetecdceu neces dele cahedecuateetenteneatenteiveddcocenbenace 284 7 7 1 RI Interface Traffic Statistic Countere KANNER NEEN ENER 284 7 7 2 R1 Interface Traffic Throughput Counters KEREN REENEN 284 7 7 3 R1 Interface Traffic Quality Counters ENEE ENNEN 285 7 7 4 R6 Interface le 286 7 7 5 Management NE Report CounterS sssssssssssurrrrnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 286 Chapter E E 287 8 1
126. NY The default is UGS the default in the device is BE Uplink Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kops for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 The default is O the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Uplink Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 The default is O Not applicable for UGS data delivery type Downlink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for downlink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY The default is UGS the default in the device is BE Downlink Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kops for downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 The default is O the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Downlink Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 The default is 0 Not applicable for UGS data de
127. ODU lt gt Page for each created ODU or Radio on page 75 Micro Outdoor BTS with Radio 1 and Radio 2 pagesODU lt gt Page GPS Page on page 78 Power Feeder Page on page 84 Antenna Page on page 86 E ASN GW AAA Page on page 90 Service Group Page on page 92 QoS Marking Page on page 107 Hot Lining Page on page 110 SFA Page on page 113 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Ka Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Introduction to Device Management H BS node with the following per each BS sub node Radio Radio Basic Page on page 130 Radio Advanced Page on page 146 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page M Site Sector on page 158 Node with a Site Sector lt gt Page for each created sector 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page 3 3 Equipment View Page The Equipment View page is applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Equipment Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW 3 3 1 Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Equipment The Equipment View page provides a graphical view of the current status of the Macro BIS components The display is refreshed every 15 seconds Site 247 PER EEE G z S 2 GEEEESR REGER ER KSE W H
128. P Managers Tab E SNMP Trap Managers Tab SNMP Managers Tab meen eee ET LSP mag gt SHP gm ooo ooa A Mode Create GQUpdate Delete Add Re lt P Revert d Resid Community ml Selfoss A Vi wrte Commray l Beie wi Swe Figure 5 39 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Managers Tab The SNMP Managers table includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Management Template Parameter Description Read Community The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is the device is public The SNMP Manager Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Read Community The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is public Write Community The SNMP Write Community string allowing execution of SNMP Set and Get operations A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default in the device is private INFORMATION The Communities are mandatory and both must be defined other than null v Duplication of Communities pairs
129. Page Control Traffic QoS Rules Tab The Control Traffic QoS Rules parameters are Parameter Description Intra ASN Diffserv Code DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic Point The range is 0 63 The default is 0 Intra ASN 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 Internal Management DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic Diffserv Code Point The range is 0 63 The default is 0 Internal Management 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic 802 1p Priority The range is 0 7 The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si 35 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 3 5 Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Bearne Ay Pooks Authentication Control Traffic QoS fades Bearer Traffic CoS ndes Mode Cese Guede Ooelete Add Nr P Revert d Feta fate Name i Marking Rule Name Al O Rue Ratus D LI Service Fiow Data Debuerg Type O Service Flow Traffic Pronty v LI Service Flow Media Flow Type LI Enable Service Flow Media Flow Type D O Oger Do p Mate S O Sir Priority Markig a SE Done Lessel Figure 5 38 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Create Mode The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table includes the following
130. Performance Collection Task wiisciccccciscsccccsressescscecsivessetecedetwscesiesestaccswsnssdevessceens 288 Soll General Ee E 289 81 2 Entities 3 On eer ee ee nr ree eee ete ec en eee ene eter er err ere ror 289 8 1 3 E de ENEE 291 8 2 Backup Configuration Task zieegugssn pteegeesgetsieen geet euer b dEg GEESS Sea 292 8 3 Restore Configuration Tarek eegene 295 8 4 Software Upgrade Task sccccepcccenscsncecceceraccuactnnccenwensutcessmasanactwesccecneaceneeceartestancess 298 8 4 1 The Software Upgrade Task EGItor cccceccceeeeseeeecneneeeneneeeeneneeeneaeeeessneneeseenees 298 8 4 2 BTS Software U pera vis visssescacsevscivcccevintieveusvestvesntinbeseeecevedvadentvesceivodduevaveveuewen 299 8 4 3 AU Software Upgrade applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS 301 8 5 File Data Aging Se ecw cet deet geess 304 Gr EH Tast emgeet Seege Gelee ee See 305 8 7 Mutual Neighboring aS se anced ee eege eege ege eege 307 8 7 1 UA ee TON E 307 8 7 2 The Mutual Neighboring Task WINGOW EEN 307 8 7 3 The Mutual Neighboring Task Report ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeneees 310 8 8 Configuration History Backup and Aging Task ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeees 311 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Contents Chapter 9 Tike File Mana Gel scicccnccisinseccncatsosonecnsactdanssansansdieecsmeednonacmasiwnoonccntinees 312 9 1 TG Eet 313 91 1 BTS EE EE 313 9 1 2 Offline Configuration Fi
131. Priority and DSCP amp Priority The default is DSCP amp Priority DSCP Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry The DSCP value to be applied for this class map 0 63 The default is O Priority Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry The VLAN priority value to be applied for this class map 0 7 where 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highest The default is 0 The Marking Actions section also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Action Adds a new entry to the Marking Actions table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Marking Actions table An Action ID that is associated to a QoS Marking Classifier cannot be deleted By default Action IDs 1 8 are pre configured The default pre configured Actions cannot be deleted or modified For more details refer to ACL Tab on page 40 QoS Marking Classifiers QoS Marking Classifiers are used to associate Classifier IDs with Action IDs The QoS Marking Classifiers table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classifier ID The auto sequential ID number of the QoS Marking Classifier Action ID The action ID number associated to the classifier Must be one of the Action IDs defined in the Marking Actions table An Action ID cannot be associated to more than one classifier The QoS Marking Classifiers section also includes
132. RION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual amp SS Q Important Notice Important Notice This User Manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting explicitly and properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd The text and graphics are for
133. RT VR BE ERT VR ANY The default is BE Media Flow Type An optional description of the type of media carried by the service flow A string of up to 15 characters The default is null Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate bps The maximum sustained traffic rate in bps for downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts Not applicable for service flows with UGS uplink data delivery type The range is 0 5 000 000 bps The default is 100 000 bps Minimum Reserved Rate bps the minimum rate in kbps reserved for for downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts Aapplicable only for service flows with the appropriate data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR The range is 0 5 000 000 bps The default is 100 000 bps For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts Not applicable for service flows with UGS uplink data delivery type The range is 0 7 The default is 0 Maximum Latency msec The maximum latency in ms allowed in the downlink service flow used for multicasts Applicable only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERT
134. S Mapped Service Group The default value 0 must be replaced by a valid value when creating a new VPLS Trunk Service Interface with Stacked VLAN Encapsulation Type INFORMATION A Service Interface associated to a Service Group cannot be deleted A QinQ service interface associated to a service flow cannot be deleted 5 2 2 2 Service Groups Tab Service Interfaces Service Groups Mode Create CO Update Delete Remove lt P Revert Service Group Name Id_ Service Group Na DHCP Function Model BEE Subnet Mask a 0 o D Default Gateway IP Address 0 0 d Service Group Type 1P D Vendor Class Identifier d Service Interface Name Vendor Specific Information Name DHCP Function Mode Proxy m Vendor Specific Information value Lease Time s 24 S DHCP Own IP Address 0 0 0 0 M5 MS Loop Back Service VLAN Interim Interval min 0 KES REH gt ery Figure 5 6 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Create Mode The Service Groups table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual hei Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description ld The automatically generated index number of the entry Service Group Name The name alias of the se
135. SS sidan 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver for AlvariSTAR User Manual Device Driver Version 3 2 January 2012 P N 215981 Document History Document History Topic Description Date Issued Version Number and date Cover page About this Manual Updated versions numbers November 2008 Managing a BTS Site Chapter 2 Updated to reflect Device Driver version 2 5 1 19 and managed device s NPU SW version 2_5_1_8 November 2008 Parameters Summary Updated to reflect Device Driver version November 2008 Chapter 4 2 5 1 19 and managed device s NPU SW version 2_5_1_8 Manual s Name Device Manager replaced by Device Driver December 2008 Using the Device Manager Chapter Chapter was removed Its contents now form December 2008 the first section in Managing a BTS Site Enabling Discovery New Chapter December 2008 The Equipment Manager New Chapter December 2008 Tasks Chapter Completely revised Overview section removed December 2008 updated version exists in the Infrastructure Manual All Task sections updated and modified The File Manager New Chapter December 2008 Offline Configuration Manager New Chapter December 2008 The Performance Viewer Updated December 2008r Managing a BTS Site and Parameters Updated to reflect 2 5 beta versions of NPU and December 2008 Summary Chapters Device Driver AlvariCRAFT
136. Section Marking Actions DSCP amp Priority 15 53 22 2011 09 21 EJ Go To Section SNMP Managers 1 15 53 23 2011 09 21 De To Section IBS Scheduler 66362 D k 12 58 19 2011 09 21 Do To Section IBS Scheduler 66368 S f 12 58 19 2011 09 21 Oco To Section IBS Scheduler 66367 E 4 12 58 19 2011 09 21 Do To Section IBS Scheduler _ _ _ 66367 _bsSchDIAbPrLvl AC li an ___ 13 59 59 2011 09 21 Dote Section b eZExport Fiter clear Fiter vi Close Figure 2 2 The Configuration History Report The Configuration History Report title includes identification details E BTS Name E BTS Number E Address IP address used for management RB Interval of the report From To For each change included in the report the following details are provided Parameter Description Group The type of entity that was changed Instance Identification of the specific entity that was changed Parameter The specific parameter that was changed applicable only for MOD operation Operation Type of change ADD DEL Delete MOD Modify Changed From The value of the parameter before the change applicable only for MOD operation In a Summarized Report this is the value at the Start Date of the report Changed To The value of the parameter after the change applicable only for MOD operation In a Summarized Report this is the value after the last change to the parameter during the report s interval Change
137. Select the parameters to be configured by marking the check box to the left a parameter name and configure the required value for each selected parameter Parameters that were not selected will be configured with the default value The mandatory row identifier s are always selected and must be configured The row identifier s must be defined taking into account the relevant existing row identifier in the target objects that will participate in the Multiple Configuration task using the template A row with row identifier s that already exist in the managed object will be rejected If the table in a target device is full the create new entry operation will be rejected After completing configuration of the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The new row s will be displayed with the configured identifier s As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table The row will be colored red Actual deletion will take effect after clicking on the Save button 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 5 1 2 2 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Configuring Templates Note that there are some dependencies among certain tables that should be taken into account when designing Create Mode t
138. TTP Redirect is applicable only if Direction is Uplink If set to HTTP Redirect then HTTP Redirect Address must be defined Filter Protocol The IP protocol number 1 255 255 means any ignore this condition The default is O in the device the default is 255 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D g Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 BS Template This section includes the followingBS Template pages M Radio Basic Page M Radio Advanced Page WR R6 R8 Bearer Interface In addition the Default BS Templates section provides general details on default templates supplied with the management system 5 3 1 Radio Basic Page The Radio Basic page comprises the following tabs General Def Tab RF Tab Base Band Tab Air Frame Structure Tab Triggers Tab 5 3 1 1 General Def Tab IB bs 3 5 H eos D Rado Advanced L RORO Bearer interface General DeF LAE Base Band J ze Frome Structure J Triggers Mode reste Upd te Geier per By cicing on a selected property name you can add amp to this fiter LI Brde Rate O Basc Rate for Management E Deponent LI Base Rate for Data O Maou Sb Burt Mode Si Citi R O Legacy AGW Mode e Figure 5 23 The BS Template Radio Basic Page General Def Tab The General Def parameters are 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D amp g Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Des
139. Table Section 8 7 2 3 below Custom This mode enables the user to make selective operations per each neighboring definition presented in the Results Table after the last run using a right click menu over the selected items see details in Custom Operations Menu Section 8 7 2 4 below Data Retrieval The Data Retrieval radio buttons enable defining the data retrieval mode for the next run of the task Option Description Database The neighboring definitions will be taken from the Management System s database This is the default mode Device The neighboring definitions will be taken from the relevant devices Results Table After running the task the results table displays the results of the last run Each entry represent a neighboring definition and includes the following sortable and filterable parameters Parameter Description Status The result of the operation executed in the last run Completed or Failed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ee D Chapter 8 Tasks Mutual Neighboring Task Parameter Description Operation The neighboring definition operation Report Fix or Delete First BS ID The BS ID of the first BS in the pair tested for mutuality Second BS ID The BS ID of the second BS in the pair tested for mutuality First Location The Location defined in the database for the BTS of the first BS First Site Th
140. Tables cccsssseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeesesneeeeaaneseneneeeenes 13 3 2 Introduction to Device Management ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeenseseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneees 15 3 3 Equipment VIEW Page mcsccs cc cbeesesecdncccecseacenrncitadewadiwacnntneecnisancaetnecoasseraeneeneeancubenies 17 3 3 1 Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Eoupment AEN 17 3 3 2 Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized AGN OWN EE 20 3 4 Site PS cis ieee EE eee ate eee ou Ee a EEEE ERa aaaeeeaa S 22 Bek Site General Ta D dccsicseiceceik ees cheweectice carne tecatencaernccsiecaeilennenccennntueraanceueevencnenmcdets 22 3 4 2 Sit Dry Contact TaD sses iaee niee a a e a aaa E a AN 25 3 5 ng UE 28 3 5 1 EZ Connectivity Pag siioni a E gEE ee 28 3 5 2 Management Page iissrissoisesitoedeis nanaonan kana ioana nA Eaa nina Aaaa ainkoa 33 3 5 3 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page sssssssssrsrruernnrnnrrunnnnrnnnnuennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn nnna 55 3 5 4 Keep Alive Eeer 57 3 5 5 ASN GW POGIS Pag E istoccscctannaanaeacsuatesasasinonndiaeemateasinnannendanenebaasanenanenenenemasneannnceel 59 3 0 Te E 61 3 6 1 Shelf eise gue GENEE 61 3 02 ETSI E 71 3 7 ASN GW E 90 Sech AAA eegener egen 90 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual E Contents 3 7 2 Service Group Pate x csacteconacsusctetlnetoredvaeuneeauncnaecesnceasctenataaeeacasateadecancaseabenedeenes 92 37 3 COS EEN ee Ee doa bes cee acca ire cea dae 107 374 Hot Lining Page crnina e a
141. Template Service Group Page Service Latency msec Media Flow Type Maximum Groups Tab Sustained Traffic Rate bps Delivery Type Minimum Reserved Rate Kbps Maximum Jitter msec IP Address Pool Start IP Address Pool End Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address Updated functionality and description Service Group Type Service Interface Name DHCP Function Mode Updated description Service Group Name Vid Map Start and Vid Map End Service Time w o IP Address Added support for Server mode Lease Time Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Renual Time Rebind Time Offer Reuse Time Server Host Name Vendor Class Identifier Vendor Specific Information Name Vendor Specific Information Value Client Boot File Name 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Cl SN Q Document History Topic Description Date Issued The Offline Configuration Tool Excel File Parameters and Configuration Rules Service Interface Parameters added support for VPLS Trunk service interfaces E Updated servicelfVlanld E Added servicelfOuterVlanld Service Group Parameters BR Added support for VPWS Mapped service groups serviceGrpVidMapRangeStart serviceGrpVidMapRangeEnq BR Added support for VPLS Hub and Spoke service groups serviceGrpVlanld September 2011 Managing a Single Device QoS Marking Page Updated Rule Number Marking Rule Name September 2011 Managing a Single D
142. To Server Available only for configuration backup and performance files when selecting files of the same type Click to export the selected file s to the file system in the management system s server Performance files are stored in filesystem SitesFiles Performance Backup files are stored in filesystem SitesFiles FullConfiguration A backup file name will be appended with the BTS Number and IP Address 9 1 2 Offline Configuration File Manager The Offline Configuration File Manager enables viewing details of Offline Configuration Offline Cfg files that were prepared using the Mass Configuration Wizard see The Mass Configuration Wizard on page 251 and are available in the database of the management system It also enables initiating the Restore Configuration Task see Restore Configuration Task on page 295 exporting files to the client file system and importing files stored in the client file system Files are added to the database by either importing them see details below or when created using the Mass Configuration Wizard You can use the Criteria Select Filters for viewing only files that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed files are 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D g Chapter 9 The File Manager The File Manager Parameter Description Site IP The IP address of the device as configured during creation of the file BTS Number
143. Type Convergence Sublayer Type IPv4CS or vlancs VLANCS service flows can be defined only for the Default Service Profile The default is IPv4CS The Convergence Sublayer Type of an existing service flow cannot be changed Media Flow Type The type of media carried by the service flow An optional string of up to 15 characters The default is null Reference Service Group The Name of an existing service group to be used by the service flow VPWS Service Groups are applicable only for VLAN CS Service Flows of the Default Service Profile IP Service Groups are applicable only for IPV4 CS Service Flows VPLS Service Groups are not applicable VPLS Service Profiles and their components can be defined only by an external AAA server The drop down list includes only valid selections according to convergence sublayer type of service groups and is sorted by creation time The default is the oldest valid service group in the database Reference Service Interface The Name for an existing QinQ service interface Applicable only if the assigned Service Group is of type VPWS QinQ in a VLANCS Service Flow of the Default Service Profile Uplink Downlink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY The default is BE Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kbps f
144. Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power The maximum Tx power available for the BTS Type in dBm Port Configuration The Port Configuration of the BTS Type 2x2 The Installed section displays read only information about the Type and the properties of the Radio that are available only for a Radio that is associated to a sector Parameter Description Radio Type The BTS type or Radio not Associated to sector 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual B el Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Frequency Band The frequency band supported by the installed BTS Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power The maximum Tx power available for the installed BTS Type in dBm Port Configuration The Port Configuration of the installed BTS Type 2x2 In addition the following Radio general properties are displayed below the Required and Installed sections Parameter Description Serial Number Read only The serial number of the BTS External Cavity Filter Existence Check to indicate the existence of an external cavity filter The default is no unchecked 3 6 2 2 2 Ports The Ports section includes parameters for the Radio module Parameter Description Tx Power dBm The required Tx power at the Radio Port in dBm The actually available range depends on BTS Type The upper limit which is t
145. U 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz After clicking Apply you may be prompted to properly configure some additional parameters in the Airframe Structure General tab and or the Air Frame Structure Zones tab After configuring the requested parameters click Apply again In addition following any change in the Bandwidth delete the current Distance triggers see Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab on page 140 and redefine them 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS 3 8 2 1 2 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab The Air Frame Structure General tab defines the general airframe parameters 4 Basic 0 0 2 55 55 55 p General Ar Frame Structure General Ar Frame Structure Zones Hetz Com Preamble Group i Segment Number fo v Proamble Index Frame Number Offset ay Total Uplink Ouration fs v sets Ha Lo Betresn w m Dore a Figure 3 43 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab The Air Frame Structure General tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 The default is 0 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Num
146. VR The range is 0 4 294 967 295 msec The default is 500 msec If data delivery type is ERTVR or UGS the default value should be 90 ms Maximum Jitter msec The maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for the downlink service flow used for multicasts Applicable only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR The range is 0 4 294 967 295 msec The default is 0 Accounting Accounting Mode Accounting mode for the service interface None No accounting support Time based The ASN GW send RADIUS Accounting Start Stop Requests The ASN GW shall also send Interim Accounting requests to AAA server using RADIUS Accounting Interim messages on a preconfigured or negotiated interval AAA server can send negotiated time interval in Access Accept message If the defined value see Interim Interval below is zero and there is no Acct Interim Interval in Access Accept interim updates should be deactivated Volume and time based Applicable only for IP Service Groups Functionality is the same as for Time option above In addition this mode supports postpaid accounting by supporting IP Session Volume Based Accounting The ASN GW will report the cumulative volume counters for each MS IP Session The counters will be collected per MS Service Flow and will be cumulated in order to get the MS IP Session counters The default is Time based 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User
147. Vendor Specific attribute 26 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Session Timeout Indicates whether Session Timeout attribute 27 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Agent Circuit ID Sub option 1 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Circuit ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Circuit ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manu al 3 7 3 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Agent Remote ID Sub option 2 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Remote ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Remote ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box Agent Subscriber ID Sub option 6 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS
148. ables defining various ranging parameters Advanced 0 0 2 55 55 55 Feedback Power Control Management QoS Ranging Start of Ranging Codes fo D TR CDMA Allocations Period D el rare Marium Col Radus fz xm ge Lo Batre w m Dore Figure 3 49 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab The Feedback tab includes the following ranging parameters Parameter Description Start of Ranging Codes The starting number of the group of codes used for the uplink The available options are 0 64 128 192 The default is O IR CDMA Allocation Period The period of IR CDMA allocations in frames The available options are 1 2 4 6 8 10 The default is 2 In the current release actual value is always 2 the configured value is ignored 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Maximum Cell Radius The maximum cell radius in km The available values are 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 The default is 2 3 8 2 2 2 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control tab enables defining the target noise and interference levels Advanced 0 0 2 55 55 55 Feedback Power Control Management QoS Target Noise amp interference Level Allowed Interference Level High Iv Target Ni 127 E Bram Forming Cabbrabon Attenuator Low attenuator Required C N Levels AC
149. ables the collection of stored performance data files from specific equipment Only files that do not exist in the database will be retrieved gt To open the Performance Collection Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following M To open a new task use the Task Wizard BR To open an existing task select a Performance Collection task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task s entry If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task BR lf the task is Inactive the Performance Collection Task Editor for the existing task is displayed The Performance Collection Task Editor includes three tabs M General Tab Section 8 1 1 M Entities Tab Section 8 1 2 HM Actions Tab Section 8 1 3 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual es amp Chapter 8 Tasks 8 1 1 General Tab General Entities Actions Performance Collection Task Task Type Equipment Line Task Name Performance Collection 4Motion Motion Collection 20090818143050 Oe bel Eed Gaon Figure 8 1 Performance Collection Task Editor General Tab The General tab of the Performance Collection task includes the following parameters Parameter Description Task Type The type of data to be collected Performance Collection This field is read only Equipment
150. ad only The current average throughput provided by the device Backhaul Ethernet port Note Not supported in current release NOTE The ASN GW Bearer interface IP address is used also in other interfaces such as the ASN and CSN e interfaces If you change the Bearer interface Source IP address you must reboot the NPU to apply H changed IP address on these interfaces The ASN GW Bearer interface IP address cannot be modified if used as the Tunnel Source IP in any Service Interface The ASN GW Bearer Interface subnet should not overlap with External Management or Local Management subnets 3 5 4 Keep Alive Page The Keep Alive page enables viewing modifying the parameters of the keep alive mechanism between the ASN GW and relevant BSs and between each BS and the relevant ASN GWs 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se E Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Keep Alive Al Entities Keep Alve E table Keep alve Pong Penod Cy s Mate of retransmissions 4 Retransmission Time Cut 5015 ms Keep Aive atus Poling Penod Number of Retranamission Retraremission Tee OF SA a 4 BS 68 22 11 ei 4 sos BS 55 55 55 4 sos elo 17 Betresn _ e m Dore Figure 3 18 Keep Alive Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology the keep alive mechanism is applicable for the internal ASN GW and for each of the defined BSs
151. aged objects For IPV4 CS service flows only L3 classification rules are applicable For VLAN CS service flows only L2 classification rules are applicable A classification rule cannot defined more than once per service flow Service Profile Config The name alias of the Service Profile Must be a Service Profile Name Name that exists in the target managed objects Service Flow Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow Must be a Flow ID belonging to the specified Service Profile that already exists in the target managed objects 5 2 6 Hot Lining Page The Hot Lining page comprises the following tabs E ASN Hot Lining Tab HM Hot Lining Profiles Tab E Hot Lining Access List Tab 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template 5 2 6 1 ASN Hot Lining Tab hese an Tick Uring Lut ning Profle Hot unmg Access Liz Mode Gesse Update Oelete Fiters By duang on a selected property name you can add to fe fiter O Hat Lining Enable D L tze Done Figure 5 20 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page ASN Hot Lining Tab The ASN Hot Lining tab include the following parameter Parameter Description Hot Lining Enable Indicates whether or not the Hot Lining feature is enabled or disabled The default is Enable 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Ge O B 209 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template 5 2
152. alancing tables and Neighbor BSs List ID IP mapping will not be copied from the golden site file to the offline created files 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File 6 3 5 Examples 6 3 5 1 Example 1 Site 1 Configuration 18 bsFeedbackZonePermBase 20 21 bsBearerlp 92 168 199 10 22 bsOfdmaDownlinkCenterFreg 355 End of BS definitions do not remove 1 Site Site 2004 2 siteld Geier hi 3 siteName Site 2004 ee 4 siteAddress 64 Main Street 5 siteRackLocation 6 jnpulplfip External mgmt 192 168 200 4 External 7 npulplMask External mgmt 255 255 255 0 Management 8 npulpRouteNextHop External mgmt 192 168 200 254 Parameters 9 npuExtMgmtVlanid 10 held ch 11 serviceZone CellSiteld SG Sectorld 14 bsName 15 BS 16 Parameters bsFrameNumberOfiset H H IT EN Figure 6 1 Specific Parameters File Example 1 The above example is for Network Elements with the following properties BW BTS with a single BS E Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology RB Connectivity Mode other than Unified In Band or Out of Band The file structure supports either Manual or Automatic definition of BS parameters For Manual mode all parameters in lines marked yellow must be configured If none of them is configured Automatic mode will take place applicable only for BTSs running SW Version 3 0 and higher The file structure supports automatic calculat
153. ally during service group creation Name The name alias of the Service Group By default the table is sorted by the order of Service Groups creation time click once on the table s Name header to sort by ascending order click again to sort by descending order click again to return to default sorting DHCP Function Mode Applicable only for IP Service Groups The DHCP function mode Server Relay Proxy The following buttons are available below the Service Groups table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the Service Groups table and opens the Editors for the Service Group Parameters and DHCP Function allowing to configure the required parameters The device can hold up to 80 service groups However the total number of IP and VPWS Transparent QinQ Mapped service groups is limited to a maximum of 10 service groups Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Service Groups table A Service Group cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a Service Flow Refer to Service Profile Page on page 120 A Service Group with an associated VLAN Service Interface cannot be deleted if the Enable Service VLAN is set to enable The Service Group Parameters Editor section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name alias of the service group A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device C
154. apped Service Group 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D hei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description End Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The end value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping Cannot be lower than Start value The default is 0 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of other existing VPWS Mapped Service Group VLAN ID Applicable only for VPLS Hub And Spoke Service Groups The own VLAN ID of the Service Group The range is 0 4094 O means untagged The default is 0 Different VPLS Service Groups may have the sane value of their own VLAN ID including multiple VLAN untagged VPLS Service Groups VPLS Local Switch Applicable only for VPLS Hub And Spoke Service Groups If set to Enable uplink multicast frames will be forwarded to both the Multicast port and the VPLS trunk port of the VPLS instance If set to Disable multicast frames will be forwarded only to the VPLS trunk port The default is Enable Multicast Service Flow Applicable only for VPLS Hub And Spoke Service Groups Delivery Type The data delivery type for downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts The options are UGS RT VR N
155. apter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Profile Number The index number of the hot lining profile An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 10 generated automatically during filter addition Profile Name The unique per BTS name of the profile A string of 1 30 characters The name of an existing profile cannot be modified HTTP Redirect URL The HTTP redirect URL to be used by filter rules with HTTP Redirect action This is the Redirection location to be used in Http Redirection message Must be configured URL in ASCII string format if in any of the filter rules associated with the profile the configured action is HTTP Redirect the string should be start with http or https Enable Profile Enables Disables the hot lining profile The default is Disable Profile parameters can be updated only when Enable Profile is set to Disable 3 7 4 4 Filter Rules Up to 16 Filter Rules may be associated to each Hot Lining Profile Filter Rules can be added updated only when the Enable Profile parameter in the device is set to Disable The Filter Rules table includes the following parameters for each entry Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the filter rule An auto sequential number generated automatically during filter addition The Rule Number serves also as the rule priority affecting the order of checking the rules for a match The first found ma
156. apter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 2 5 Management Tab je 85 3 i See SSS amp os D fada Basie Dy Rado advanced i Made vente Updte O Delete Fiers By od on a selected property name you can add amp ta this fier LI Uplink Median Noise d m 593 Figure 5 32 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management parameters are Parameter Description Uplink Median Noise The uplink median noise level represents the median value of the noise floor histogram If the uplink median noise level exceeds this value an excessive uplink median noise alarm will be generated The range is from 135 to 100 dBm In the device the default value of 124 is set to 3 dB above the default value of the Target NI parameter In the template manager the default is 135 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual GC O 230 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 2 6 QoS Tab Ranging Feedback Allocations L Power Control Beam Farming Management Gos Mode ee Update elte Piters By dcing on a selected property name you can add R to the fer LI Scheduler Mode D O Scheduler D Abuse Protection Level Scheduler U Abuse Protection Level e Figure 5 33 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS parameters are Parameter Description Scheduler Mode The basis for allocating excess bandwidth
157. arameter above The default is 19 16 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 16 QAM 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 14 see 16 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is 22 64 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 14 see 16 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is 23 64 QAM 2 3 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 7 see 64 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is 25 64 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 7 see 64 QAM 2 3 parameter above The default is 26 64 QAM 5 6 The C N in dB required for transmitting 64 QAM 5 6 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Require
158. arameters that require reset will take effect after restart Reset To Factory Default The system will be restarted with factory default configuration IMPORTANT All configurations will be deleted This also means loosing the ability to manage the unit from remote Local configuration of specific mandatory parameters using CLI is required to enable remote management of the site using the management system Refer to the Enabling Discovery on page 1 for details Reset To Factory Default With Connectivity The system will be restarted with factory default configuration except to parameters that are required to maintain management connectivity to the unit The parameters that are maintained without any change include E Management Port parameters HM Management interfaces parameters BW SNMP Managers configurations E Trap Managers configurations Site ID No Action The default option no reset or shutdown operation 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO el 3 6 2 3 6 2 1 3 6 2 1 1 gt Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Shutdown Power AU to ODU section enables control of the power from each port It also enables controlling the operation of each port by disabling transmission receive only mode The available options for each of the available ports 1 4 in Macro Indoor BTS and a 4 Channels AU in Macro Outdoor BTS 1 2 in Micro Outdoor BTS and a 2 Channels AU in
159. arized Report Figure 2 1 The Configuration History Request In the Interval section select Start Date and End Date for the report Select the Filter SYSTEM Logs to include in the report only changes made by users of the same NMS system De select this option to include also all changes made by the system These includes changes initiated by the device itself as a response to various events changes made via Telnet SNMP and changes made using other NMS servers The default is selected checked Select Summarized Report to show in the report only the changes betweem the requested Start Date and End Date For example if a certain parameter was modified more than once during the specified interval only a single change entry will be provided indicating the last relevant change the value in Changed From will be the value at Start Date If following any series of changes the status of a ceraing parameter at End Date is the same as in Start Date no change will be indicated in the report De select the Summarized Report option to include in the report all changes history The default is de selected unchecked Click on the OK button to generate the requested report 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 2 Using the Equipment Manager Configuration History Request and Report Equipment gt BTS Name Root A 2 5 BTS Number Dei Address 10 10 161 136 Interval gt From 11 20 17 2011 09 01 to 12 20 17 201
160. asks Updated to reflect all GUI changes of August 2009 Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 Updated to reflect the new Task Wizard Added CLI Task Added Neighboring Task Added Multiple Configuration Task Template Manager New feature August 2009 Parameters Summary Updated to reflect all changes of release 2 5 2 August 2009 including updated ranges defaults Supported equipment Updated manual to reflect support for October 2009 Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual OO Document History Topic Description Date Issued Enabling Discover Updated sections on VLAN Translation External Management Interface and Static Route Definition October 2009 AAA Page Added VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment November 2009 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Template Manager Added new options to Agent Circuit ID and Agent Remote ID Corrected Sub options numbers November 2009 Enabling Discovery Added support of SNMP v2c March 2010 Using the Equipment Manager Revised March 2010 Managing a Single Device Completely revised and updated to reflect the March 2010 following New structure new products new features new removed modified parameters improved descriptions Template Manager Completely revised and updated to reflect March 2010 updated concept new features new removed modified parameters improved descriptions Task
161. assification Cordig Has Id Casse zk Home A From O LI Enable TOPE Seuren Port D Figure 5 14 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Port Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Source Port tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Source Port parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Source Port table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description ld The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Source Port Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects From To Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled The range of values From To of the source ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 1 The default in the device is From 1 To 65535 Enable TCP UDP Source Indicates whether the use of a range of source ports is enabled for the Port classification rule The default is no If enabled then Enable IP Protocol for
162. atch the rule Pass Drop HTTP Redirect The default is Pass HTTP Redirect is applicable only if Direction is Uplink If set to HTTP Redirect then HTTP Redirect Address see Profiles Table above must be defined The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table allowing to configure new rule s parameter Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table SFA Page The Service Flow Authorization SFA functionality handles creation maintenance of pre provisioned service flows for MS It maps the AAA parameters service profile name received from the AAA server to pre configured WiMAxX specific QoS parameters in the NPU The SFA page enables configuring and maintaining service flows including configuring Packet Header Suppression PHS rules multiple service profiles with multiple service flows and classification rules The SFA page includes the following tabs E PHS Rules Tab HM Classification Rules Tab In addition the Service Profile sub node of the SFA node enables creating new service profiles and viewing modifying service profiles PHS Rules Tab The PHS Rules tab enables defining rules for Packet Header Suppression PHS PHS rules are provisioned on a per service profile name basis 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW PHS Ru
163. ate Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Tab 218 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Triggers Tab 222 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Ranging Tab 224 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Feedback Allocations Tab 225 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab AE 226 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Beam Forming Tab 229 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Management Tab 230 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page QOS Tab 231 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab 232 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ASNGW Pools Tab 233 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab 234 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Control Traffic QoS Rules Tab 235 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Create Geesen 236 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Managers Tab 238 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Trap Managers Tab 240 The Management Template Performance Page Connectivity ASN GW Counters Tab The Management Template Logging Page NPU Logging Tab 242 The Management Template Logging Page Log severity Tab 243 The Equipment Template Shelf Page NPU System Management Tab 245 The Equipment Template Shelf Page AU Control Tab Macro BTS 247 The Equipment Template Shelf Page AU Control Tab Micro BTS 248 The Equipm
164. ate VPLS Trunk service interface 7 EMS_after_offfine on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment a Service Group Serve Interfaces Servos Groups A Service Groups Service Group Name DHCP Furto Service Group Parameters 1 ES server Nene Type C Service Interface Name iww Service Time mia IP Address al DHCP Function Mode Server e ivj Lease Tme L Ma So DHCP Own IP Address 0 0 0 0 H Loop Dech Disable EI Accounting Accounting Mode Tene based m Inkerion Interval T Seet TE red DH Function Addressns Configuration Address Abu ste Timeout Primary ONS Server o 0 0 4 Renewal Time 0 3 of Lease Time Secondary ONS Server 0 0 0 0 Retend Tun 75 S of Lease Tine Ei GI ch Betrest vi Ari Dore Figure 3 33 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Add Service Group The Service Groups tab includes the Service Groups table and the Editors for Service Group Parameters and DHCP Function Select an entry in the table to open the Editors for the Service Group Parameters and the DHCP Function tor for the selected service group 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The Service Groups table includes the following read only parameters for each of the existing service groups Parameter Description Service Group Number The index number of the Service Group 1 80 An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 80 generated automatic
165. ate gt BTS Number and configure the BTS number The BTS Number must be unique in the managed network 3 Configuring the Management Interface Parameters Select BTS gt Connectivity gt Management Interface gt updateParam You will be prompted to configure the following parameters for some parameters you may just press Enter to keep the default value VLAN ID default 12 Source IP Address a unique IP address must be defined IP Subnet Mask default 255 255 255 0 802 1P Priority default 0 DSCP default 0 Next Hop Gateway a valid value in the subnet of the Source IP Address must be defined 4 Configuring the L1 amp L2 Parameters if necessary The default Auto Negotiation mode is Auto If manual setting of physical interface parameters is required select BTS gt Connectivity gt L1 amp L2 gt updateParam You will be prompted to configure the Auto Negotiation parameter The following parameters are applicable only if Manual mode was selected Port Speed default is 1000 Mbps Available options are 10 100 1000 Mbps Duplex Mode default is Full Duplex Available options are Half Duplex Full Duplex 5 Configuring the SNMP Manager An SNMP Manager comprises a pair of SNMP Communities Read Community and Write Community A management station is permitted to manage the BTS using SNMP only if it uses a pair 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D amp Q Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery of SNMP
166. ates ASN GW Template 5 2 4 5 Classification Rule Source Address Tab GEA Config Ps tudes Gissefication Config sian Ride Protocol Clsse icsbon Rue Source Address Clsssfication Rule Destination Adaress Glasstication Rule source Por cl lt gt Mode Create Upda Delte dag Ke D Revert VY assticabon Contig Name Td Classification Config Nene LI Seurce Address Dr scurce Mask O Enade P Source Classifier Figure 5 12 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Address Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Source Address tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Source Address parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Source Address table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Source Address Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects IP Source Address Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The IP source address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 Must be set to a valid value
167. ation Rule When adding a new rule double click on the relevant entry A drop down list will open displaying avaiable options For IPV4 CS service flows only L3 classification rules are applicable For VLAN CS service flows only L2 classification rules are applicable The drop down list includes only valid selections according to convergence sublayer type of classification rules that were not already defined for the service flow and is sorted by creation time The Rule Name of an existing Reference Classification Rule cannot be modified The Reference Classification Rule section also includes the following buttons beneath each of the tables Button Description Add UL Rule Adds a new entry to the respective table Add DL Rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the respective table 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D d 3 8 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS BS The BS node is not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The BS node enables the configuration of various properties related to radio transmissions connectivity and services of each BS The BS node includes the following subnode and page for each existing BS E Radio Radio Basic Page Radio Advanced Page M R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page NOTE Many BS parameters are applied only after resting the AU This is indicated by a pop up message If applicable do not forget
168. atus of connectivity with the default gateway Unknown Up down The keep alive mechanism starts only after first registration at the ASN GW Until then this mechanism is disable and connectivity status is Unknown Default Authenticator IP Address The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW In Distributed ASN GW Topology this is typically the IP address of the NPU s Bearer interface Active MSs The threshold for the number of MSs in active operation state not Idle served by the BS Exceeding this threshold sets the alarm Excessive MS number The range is 0 1024 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled The default is 1024 Legacy ASN GW Mode Defines functionality supported by ASN GW Select Enable if using a Cisco ASN GW does not support Ethernet CS services Select Disable if using any other approved ASN GW The default is Disable ASN GW Load Balancing At the unit NPU level up to two pools with different priorities each with up to 10 ASN GWs can be defined see ASN GW Pools Page on page 59 Each BS defined in the unit will inherit these pools It should be noted the ASN GW defined in the BS as the Default Authenticator will be automatically added to the Primary Pool that is the higher priority pool if not included already Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS At the BS level you can enable disable the use of each of the two pools The default is Disable
169. aying the available options 58Amp 35Amp The default is 58Amp Installed HW Version Read only The current supply capability of the installed card empty for a PIU that is not installed 3 6 1 1 2 PSU Card Properties The PSU Card Properties table includes the following parameters for each PSU card slot Parameter Description Slot Number Read only The number of slot allocated to the PSU card 1 4 Required Indicates whether the PSU card is required in the specified slot Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options Yes No The default is Yes Installed Read only The status of the PSU card installation Installed or Not installed Operational Read only The operational status of the PSU card Operational or Down 3 6 1 2 NPU Page The NPU page is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS The NPU page displays the properties of the NPU card and enables control of the card and configuration of the time for automatic scheduling of the configuration backup 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Sei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment 3 6 1 2 1 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual d NPU Cord Properties Sot Number Instaled Yes Serial Number 7619735 HW Verson Number HW Revision Number 3 Operational SW Version Number ree 5211S Shadow SW Version Number fou 2 5 2114 Currerk Running SW Sourc
170. b Removed August 2009 Radio Advanced Page Management Removed general Downlink Dropped Packets August 2009 Tab Ratio parameter Added new parameters for Alarm Threshold for Downlink Dropped Packet Ratio per service type Added new parameters for Alarm Thresholds for noise and interference level Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab New feature August 2009 Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Tab Added VLAN ID read only August 2009 Updated descriptions of IP Address and Default Gateway 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Connectivity Advanced Page QoS New Name was Bearer Plane August 2009 Marking Rules Tab l g Updated range for Service Flow Data Delivery Type Connectivity Advanced Page Keep New feature August 2009 Alive Tab Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Moved from Connectivity Basic Page to August 2009 Mapping Tab Connectivity Advanced Page Services Page Definition Tab Changed the name was previously Service August 2009 Definition Changed the structure Added parameters related to Idle Mode Added Basic Rate parameters moved from previous Radio Advanced Page Rate Adaptation Tab Removed Max Sub Burst Size and Target Packet Error Rate Services Page Mapping Tab Removed SDU Size August 2009 Updated limitation in Service Name Updated supported options for R1 Profile Data Delivery Scheduling Type Updated limitations for R1 Profile Prior
171. base is higher than the value configures for the days threshold parameter the file will be deleted from the database 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 8 Tasks CLI Task 8 6 CLI Task In the Local CRAFT Utility the CLI Task is applicable only to the managed device The CLI task enables executing a CLI script file on target device s E gt To open the CLI Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard and select the CLI option E To open an existing task select an existing CLI task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the CLI Task Editor for the selected task is displayed o ogs CLI Task General CLI Protocol Bd Port NE Type 4mMacroBTS si Macro BTS Password Equipment Location 10 10 144 201 CLI Script e BIS Kai Es sz Figure 8 9 CLI Task Editor 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual a Chapter 8 Tasks CLI Task The CLI Task editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description General Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task A string of O t
172. ber 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 The default is 1 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above and the configuration of Map Major Groups see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab on page 133 used for the FDC transmission The default is 0 Preamble Index Read only The Preamble Index used by the BS 0 113 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The available options are Zero and Random If Random is selected the AU will choose a random number between 0 to 15 The default is zero 0 Total Uplink Duration The total duration of the uplink in a frame in slots one slot equals 3 symbols To avoid BS BS interference the ul dl allocation must be identical in all BSs in a geographical region The range is 4 7 for bandwidth of 5 or 10MHz 3 5 for bandwidth of 7MHz The default is 6 After each change in the Bandwidth parameter the value is changed to lt blank gt and must be configured to a proper value See table below for details on DL UL ratio as a function of BS Bandwidth and Total Uplink Duration Table 3 8 DL UL Ratios
173. bled this parameter defines the date for starting the daylight saving feature At the beginning of this date midnight at the beginning of this date the clock will be advanced by the amount of hours specified by the Advance Hour Factor see below Use the format dd mm to define the date and month at which to start activating the Daylight Saving feature Stop Date When Daylight Saving is enabled this parameter defines the date for ending the daylight saving feature at Advance Hour Factor hours after midnight at the end of this date Use the format dd mm to define the date and month at which to end activating the Daylight Saving feature 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Advance Hour Factor When Daylight Saving is enabled this parameter defines the amount of time by which the clock should be advanced during the daylight saving period The available values are O daylight saving disabled 1 and 2 hours The default is 0 3 6 2 3 2 BS Clock Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Parameter Description External 1 PPS Clock Indicates whether the external 1PPS clock is enabled or disabled If the External 1PPs clock is enabled synchronization of air frames for inter site and intra site sectors should be managed by the external 1PPS GPS clock If the External 1PPS cloc
174. cally for each new SNMP Trap Manager see SNMP Managers Tab on page 48 External Log TFTP Server see Logging Tab on page 53 or SW Upgrade TFTP Server see Software Upgrade Task on page 298 These entries will be updated deleted upon modification deletion of the relevant Server The configuration of these entries is E Destination Server s IP address M Mask 255 255 255 255 E Next Hop External Management Next Hop IP address see External Management Interface on page 35 These entries will be changed automatically following any change in the External Management Next Hop IP address NOTE Automatically created routes for new SNMP Trap Managers External Log TFTP Server or SW Upgrade TFTP Server are not displayed in the IP Routing table 3 5 2 5 In addition the default Any Destination entry with Destination 0 0 0 0 and Mask 0 0 0 0 may be created The Next Hop IP address of this route must be in the same subnet with one of the NPU IP interfaces according to specific network topology and needs SNMP Managers Tab The SNMP Managers tab enables managing the lists of Authorized SNMP Managers and SNMP Trap Managers 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gel Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Management Management Interface QoS Marking Rules ACL IP Routng SNMP Managers Performance Logano SNMP Managers Manager Number Read Commuty Wree Comm
175. cannot be updated The IP address of the DHCP relay proxy Must be different from other instances of DHCP Own IP Address in the device For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new IP Service Group MS MS Loopback Applicable only for IP Service Groups Indicates whether MS MS loopback is enabled or disabled for the service interface The default is Enable Service VLAN Applicable only for IP Service Groups with an attached VLAN service interface Indicates the status of a VLAN service interface attached to the service group Not applicable when the attached Service Interface is IP in IP If a Service Group with Service VLAN enabled is attached to a Service Profile Service VLAN cannot be disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Accounting Mode Accounting mode for the service interface E None No accounting support E Time based The ASN GW send RADIUS Accounting Start Stop Requests The ASN GW shall also send Interim Accounting requests to AAA server using RADIUS Acc
176. ccrss Ue ni Mode creste Oupdge Delete a x H Revert d Fior Rules Name iT Fite Rides name not Urang Profien 1 D d tet Unig Profiles Profile name LI Fier fades freeen F O Fier Rues IP address O Fier Rates Mask LI Fier Source Port Sart O Fiter Source Port Sop O Per Rates Destination Port Start LI Fier fades Destination Port Stap s O Fier Rules Oso Rart O Fiter Rues Deep Sop LJ Pe Action v LI Fier Protocol Gane aoe LH Figure 5 22 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Access List Tab Create Mode The Hot Lining Access List table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description ld The automatically generated index number of the entry Filter Rules Name The name alias of the Filter Rule Hot Lining Profiles Profile Name The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile The Hot Lining Access List Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Filter Rules Name The name alias of the Filter Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory when creating a new rule Hot Lining Profiles Profile Name The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be a name of a Profile that already exists in the target managed objects Filter Rules Direction The direction for which the rule should
177. ce 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task Parameter Description BTS Number The ID number of the device Site ID as configured in the device Software Version The running software version of the device NPU IP Address The IP address of the device State The operational state of the equipment Up Down Unreachable Unknown 8 1 3 Actions Tab Performance Collection General Entities Actions E collection export Default Folder C AlvariSTAR filesystem SitesFiles Performance Giele e E Ei a kon Figure 8 3 Performance Collection Task Editor Actions Tab The Actions tab enables setting how collected performance data is saved By default the performance data is saved in the management system s file system In addition the performance data xml files can be exported and saved in the client management system s file system To automatically export the collected data to the location indicated in the read only Default Folder text box select the Collection eXport check box 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 8 Tasks Backup Configuration Task 8 2 Backup Configuration Task In the Local CRAFT Utility the Configuration Backup Task is applicable only to the managed device The Backup Configuration task enables the retrieval of device s configuration backup file s from selected device
178. ch row 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Name The name alias of the Service Profile The Service Profile Config Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name alias of the Service Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing Service Profile cannot be updated Indicates whether the profile is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Profile Status when adding a new service profile the status can t be enabled only after associating a service flow the status can be updated to enabled Service Flow Tab Kee Lang roi Cocfig Service e Ut Reference Classfication nde Ok Reference Clessticeton Rude 5 2 5 2 Mode Geste OUpdste Q Delete PAM Weee C revert d row Ps ID Service Profile Co IN d Service Protie Contig Name LJ Cormergence sublayer Type O Meda Flow Type Uplink Data Debary Type LI UW QO U O o LI EI C Vert Tratti Priorty O Commiink Data Delivery Type O Ooi Trafic Pratz Uplink Max Sustaned Traffic Rate bps Dowelink Max Sustained Traffic Rate bos Reference Service Group Reference Service Interface Uplink Min Rese
179. ckground color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Card Properties on page 63 but is not installed the background color is orange If a module is installed but not defined yet the background color is purple Double click on an installed or a required but not installed AU to open the configuration page for the selected AU refer to AU lt Type and Slot gt Page on page 67 E inan installed AU each of the ODU connectors channels are marked as follows Green The ODU port is Up no fault and the ODU port is set to No Shutdown Red The ODU port is Down fault or the ODU port is set to Shutdown M Double click on an empty AU module to open the New AU dialog box allowing you to define the properties of the AU required for the slot Refer to Creating Deleting an AU on page 65 for more details M Click on an installed AU port to view relevant associations if applicable A blue background will be added to the selected AU Port as well as to the ODU and Site Sector associated with it 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page 3 3 1 2 Components View Macro Outdoor BTS m Site 100 SAU DAU 1 NAU DAU 2 EN Oe Oe Cie Egz CHCRCHCH GI CRCRCRCR KS Cia Cia Ci Cia
180. cpSrvDfltlpoGw Applicable for IP service groups Applicable only in DHCP Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the IP address of the Default Gateway to be provided by the local DHCP Server with the device IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept dhcpSrvExcludelpAddr Applicable for IP service groups Applicable only in Server mode An IP addresses that is to be excluded from the address pool This parameter may be repeated as many times as required up to 16 384 addresses 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File Parameter Name in File Description serviceGrpVidMapRangeStart Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The start value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping The default is 0 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of other existing VPWS Mapped Service Group serviceGrpVidMapRangeEnd Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The end value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping Cannot be lower than Start value The default is 0 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID any in
181. cription Basic Rate The uplink basic rate QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 the default in the device is QPSK 1 2 Basic Rate for The downlink basic rate for management Management QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 the default in the device is QPSK 1 2 Deployment The type of deployment in the area served by the BS Fix or Mobile To support proper handover should be set to Fix only if mobile MSs are not expected The default is Fix 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Sei D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description BS Basic Rate for Data The downlink basic rate for data QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 the default in the device is QPSK 1 2 Maximum Sub Burst Mode The maximum size of a downlink sub burst The value of this parameter affects the achievable throughput in MIMO B point to point links one MS as follows Basic up to 12 Mbps Standard up t
182. cro Outdoor BTS Integrity Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS 3 5 2 6 4 MS Counters Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for MS Counters MS Basic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS 3 5 2 7 Logging Tab The Logging tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS The Logging tab enables defining various logging parameters including the minimum severity level for which an event generates a log entry 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Management Management Interface QoS Marhng Rules ACL IP Routing SNMP Managers Performance Losana Remote Lag Server J Enable lagging to server Server 1P een O Log to Fle WR Enable lagging to file Log Severty Performance Internal AU Manager Ile gi Be v s Dore Figure 3 16 Management Page Logging Tab The Logging tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Remote Log Server Enable logging to server Indicates whether or not logging to the server is enabled If enabled the server IP address is indicated in the Server IP text box The default is Disable unchecked Server IP The server IP address of the server on which logs are to be maintained If logging to server is enabled the Server IP cannot be changed The default is 192 168 0 1 Log to File Enable loggi
183. ctoty Aa em E R3 terface Traffik E Re interface Total Trafic E Re interface Traffic Per 8S E Ms resources reports 2 E Provisioned Qos E 85 Counters DMS Counters Ed e 17 Betresn e m ks Figure 3 15 Management Page Performance Tab The Performance tab includes the following components 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D O Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Performance Group Activation A list of counters groups as detailed below with a check box next to each group s name Select a check box to enable collection and storage of performance data for the counters group The default is enable collection checked for all groups Enabling disabling of a group shall take effect at the managed object starting at the beginning of the next aggregation period 15 minutes The data of parameters of disabled collection groups will not be included in the file generated at the end of the aggregation period during which collection was disabled The Performance page includes the following sections HM Connectivity E ASN GW WH BS Counter MS Counters 3 5 2 6 1 Connectivity Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for NPU Connectivity NPU Backhaul Port Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW NPU Cascade Port Macro Indoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW NPU Internal Management
184. d The ACL Parameters table also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Rule Parameters Editor enabling configuration of parameters for the new rule Rules can be added only if the Active State of the ACL is Up Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Rules can be deleted only if the Active State of the ACL is Down The ACL Parameters Editor displays the following parameters for the rule selected in the ACL Parameters table Parameter Description Source IP Address The source IP address to allow deny traffic from The address 0 0 0 0 means any address The default is 0 0 0 0 In ACL 199 rules must be the IP address of the Bearer or External Management or Internal Management interface Source IP Mask Not configurable for ACL 199 The mask for the source IP address allowing to define a range of source addresses subnet from which to allow deny traffic The default is 255 255 255 255 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si oO Gel Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Minimum Source Port Applicable only for an extended ACL The minimum source port number of the application traffic from which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 0 Maximum Source Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable
185. d 1 for both entries if a 2 ports antenna is defined Antenna Port Number The antenna port number 1 for both entries for 1 port antennas 1 and 2 for a 2 ports antenna 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager In This Chapter The Network Maintenance Manager on page 164 Retrieval of MS Data on page 164 Retrieval of All MSs Data on page 166 Single MS De Registration on page 168 All MSs De Registration on page 169 4 1 4 1 1 Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager supports MS Level operations related to the display of the momentary values of a predefined set of parameters of a specific Mobile Subscriber MS These parameter values can to be evaluated during operator initiated troubleshooting In addition this feature enables forced de registration of one or multiple MSs from the network In the current release MS level operations supported by the management system are targeted towards the ASN GW To open the Network Maintenance Manager L Select Managed Network gt Network Maintenance from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Network Maintenance Manager window opens 2 In the Operation drop down menu select the required operation The available options are Retrieval of MS Data on page 164 Retrieval of Al
186. d The default is disable the default in the device is enable 5 4 3 2 Log Severity Tab D s eet Mode Create Update Fiters By clicking on a selected property name you can add R to thes fie C Performance Di D a O Sate ze Pout O SW versen EI O Connectivity a anew D L 7 Internal AU Manager Gsesltzzss Done J Figure 5 43 The Management Template Logging Page Log severity Tab The Log Severity tab enables setting the minimum severity level that generates a log entry for each of the following types of events 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Management Template Parameter Description Performance Performance management procedures Shelf Shelf management procedures Startup System startup procedures Fault Fault management procedures SW Version Software upgrade procedures Connectivity Connectivity procedures ASN GW ASN GW procedures Internal AU Manager Internal processes used for managing the AUs not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The available minimum severity options are Disable no logging Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational The default for all event types is Disable the default in the device is Error 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Equipment Templa
187. d Adds a new entry to the table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table An existing association cannot be modified to modify an association delete it and add the modified association To add an association click on the Add button A new line is added to the table Double click on each parameter s entry to open a drop down selection menu with the available options according to the status of the relevant components in the database Creation of a new Sector Association entry will succeed only if all the following conditions are met 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 9 2 3 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Sector The specified BS object exists and is properly configured All mandatory parameters have been configured properly The configured frequency is within the valid range defined by the required ODU type in the specified ODU object and the bandwidth parameter The Operator ID is the same as Operator ID configured for previously associated BSs An ODU Port combination of ODU No and ODU Port No cannot appear in more than one entry All ODUs associated with the same AU must use the same frequency band An AU Port combination of AU Slot No and AU Port No cannot appear in more than one entry An Antenna Port combination of Antenna No and Antenna Port No cannot appear in more than one entry A specific Antenna can only be associated wi
188. d By The user that made the change In a Summarized Report this is the user that made the last change to the relevant parameter 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual CG D Chapter 2 Using the Equipment Manager Configuration History Request and Report Parameter Description Changed At Time and date of the change In a Summarized Report this is the time and date of the last change to the relevant parameter Configuration Section A Go To section cut through link to the relevant configuration page in the Device Manager or to the general Site page if there is no configuration page for the Group Double click on an entry to open a Record Data window providing all configuration details of the relevant Groups Instance You can use the Filter option to view only changes associated with a specific group entity type Type a string of characters to filter the list on the fly Only Groups that include the entered string will be displayed To export the report as a CSV file click on the Export button to open the Export dialog box allowing you to define file name and location 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device INFORMATION This Chapter describes the Device Manager for the BTS equipment Indoor and ST Outdoor and for the Mini Centralized ASN GW Appropriate note will indicate pages or parameters that are applicable not applicable for all de
189. d C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 7 see 64 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is 28 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 8 2 2 3 3 8 2 2 4 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Note The Required C N Levels are configurable only by using the Multiple Configuration task Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management tab enables defining the Alarm Threshold for Noise and Interference L evel dvanced 255 243 41 0 0 101 Feedback Power Control Management Qos Alarm Thresholds for Noise and Interference Level Uplink Median Noise d m 124 1 Betrest e An Dore E 5 Figure 3 51 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab Parameter Description Uplink Median Noise The uplink median noise level represents the median value of the noise dBm floor histogram If the uplink median noise level exceeds this value an excessive uplink median noise alarm will be generated The value is in dBm tone The default value of 124 is set to 3 dB above the default value of the Target NI parameter see Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab on page 147 The range is from 135 to 100 dBm Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS tab enables defining QoS management parameters for scheduling uncommitted traffic above the maximum reserved rate Scheduling uncommitted traffic can be done using one of the following options E
190. d or use the lt and gt to zoom in on a selected time interval To return to the default display after zoom in and or shifting the time axis left click and move the mouse to the left while holding the left button down Right click to open the copy save options menu enabling you to save the current graph as a PNG Image File or copy it to the Clipboard 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer General Controls 7 5 General Controls The following graph controls are available BR Polling Interval The available options for the Polling Interval are 5 10 20 and 60 seconds The default is 5 seconds To change the polling interval select the required interval and click on the Apply button next to it M Stop Available only when at least one counter is selected Select to stop polling and deselect all counters E Print To print or preview a graph click on Print A pop up menu opens with three options Print To open the Print dialog box for selecting a printer setting up the printing properties and printing the graph section Print Preview Displays a preview of the graph section before printing Page Setup To open the Page Setup dialog box 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 7 6 7 6 1 Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer ASN GW Counters Groups ASN GW Counters Groups The ASN GW Counters Groups include AAA Counte
191. d while downloading a table to the ODU 3 The ODU temperature is high 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Power amplifier failure 7 The ODU has detected an internal hardware problem 8 32 Not used 3 6 2 2 Radio The Radio Node is appl Radio 2 icable only for Micro Outdoor BTS It includes two Radio pages Radio 1 and The Radio page includes the properties of the respective Radio 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual E CS P Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Radio 1 General Requred Rado Type Frequency Barri Maximum Tx Power Port Configuration Serial Number External Cavity Fiter Existence Ports Configuration Installed Rado Type Me Frequency Band Em Maspnan Tx Power Port Configuration Tx Power s HW Version HW Revision Aa Card HPA HW Verson DER SW Version PUD SW Version Serial Number OOU Status oa Dore 36 0000 Se EE i tren Not Inctalied tren unknown vie 17 Seel e m Figure 3 27 Radio Page The Radio page includes the following sections E General E Ports 3 6 2 2 1 General The General section is divided into sub sections The Required section enables viewing the read only Type of the BTS It also provide read only properties of the Radio based on the BTS type Parameter Description Radio Type The BTS type Frequency Band The frequency band supported by the BTS
192. ding CQI reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for ACK 8 to Required C N Level for ACK 7 see ACK parameter above The default is 12 CDMA The C N in dB required for transmitting CDMA reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CQI 8 to Required C N Level for CQI 7 see CQI parameter above The default is 9 QPSK 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CDMA 16 to Required C N Level for CDMA 14 see CDMA parameter above The default is 13 QPSK 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 14 see QPSK 1 2 parameter above The default is 16 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description 16 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for transmitting 16 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 7 see QPSK 3 4 p
193. dress and VLAN are used to connect to the NMS server AAA server HA and BS The MGMT port and CSCD port are assigned to the local management VLAN in this connectivity mode The CSCD port is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS The default Connectivity Mode is In Band NOTE A change in Connectivity Mode will take effect after next reset 3 5 2 1 1 2 External Management Interface The External Management Interface section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 192 168 1 1 In a Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and Mini Centralized ASN GW if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified the Source IP Address is not configurable and is set to the value configured for the ASN GW Bearer Interface Source IP Address see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 55 A change in this parameter will affect the relevant rules for ACL 199 and all entries in the IP Routing table using the External Management Source IP Address as the Destination For details refer to Section 3 5 2 1 1 4 below Subnet MAsk The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 In a Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and Mini Centralized ASN GW if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified the Subnet Mask is not configurable and is set to the value configured for the ASN GW Bearer Interface Subn
194. during reading Total provisioned UL MIR to all services Total provisioned UL CIR during reading Total provisioned UL CIR to all services Total provisioned UL UGS MIR during reading Total provisioned UL MIR to all UGS services Total provisioned UL UGS CIR during reading Total provisioned UL CIR to all UGS services Total provisioned UL eRT MIR during reading Total provisioned UL MIR to all ERT services Total provisioned UL eRT CIR during reading Total provisioned UL CIR to all ERT services Total provisioned UL RT MIR during reading Total provisioned UL MIR to all RT services Total provisioned UL RT CIR during reading Total provisioned UL CIR to all RT services Total provisioned UL nRT MIR during reading Total provisioned UL MIR to all NRT services Total provisioned UL nRT CIR during reading Total provisioned UL CIR to all NRT services Total provisioned UL BE MIR during reading Total provisioned UL MIR to all BE services Management Initial NE Counters Management Initial NE counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs Management Initial NE counters provide information on Initial Network Entry success failure parameters The available Management Initial NE counters are Counter Name Counts the Number of succeed initial network entries Number of succeed init
195. e If enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be either 6 TCP or 17 UDP TCP UDP Destination Port Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled Configurable only when Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled The range of values From To of the destination ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 65535 Cannot be updated in an existing rule 3 7 5 3 Service Profile The NPU allows for guaranteed end to end QoS for user traffic across the ASN The QoS approach is connection oriented whereby user traffic is classified into service flows A service flow is a unidirectional stream of packets either in the downlink or uplink direction associated with a certain set of QoS requirements such as maximum latency The QoS requirements for service flows are derived from service profiles defined by the operator A service profile is a set of attributes shared by a set of service flows For instance an operator might define a service profile called Internet Gold that will include QoS and other definitions to be applied to service flows associated with users subscribed to the operator s Internet Gold service package The factory default configuration includes an empty no defined Service Flows Service Profile with the name Default If enabled it will be used if profile descriptor is missing in servic
196. e O Maum Sze Fmbi O Mariman Size symbok C Mimun Map Size siots Neighbor Besmforming Ci iq OS PS UR cd ed lcd S e CH semi Figure 5 26 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Tab The Air Frame Structure parameters are Parameter Description Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 The default is 0 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 The default is 1 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map see below used for the FDC transmission The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D g Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The available options are Zero 0 and Random If Random is selected the AU will choose a random number between 0 to 15 The default is 0 Total Uplink Duration The total duration of the uplink in a frame in slots one sl
197. e 3 7 Translation of VLAN ID on VPLS Trunk Service Interface Encapsulatio Outer VLANID Own Action n Mode of VLAN ID of VLAN ID Service of Service of Interface Service Interface Service Interface Group Stacked VLAN Z X Untagged On egress VLAN tag is added VID X Outer VLAN tag is added SVID Z On ingress VLAN tag is removed Service Groups Tab The Services Groups tab enables viewing modifying the parameters of existing service group It also enables adding new service groups up to a maximum of 10 and removing service groups A service group is a group of MSs that are served by the same service provider or service flows that belong to the same service class The following service group types are supported IP This type of service group is used only for IP CS flows Once service group is configured as type IP additional IP allocation configuration is also required such as DHCP mode IP pool IP Subnet etc This type of service group must be associated with either IP IP encapsulated IP packets or VLAN type of R3 service interface An IP service group can be configured to support time based or volume and time based accounting In addition an IP service group can be configured to support direct communication between MSs belonging to the service group VPWS Transparent This type of service group is used only for VLAN CS flows Once service group is configured as VPWS Transparent type IP all
198. e Bearer interface IP address of the target device RH ASN GW BTS Number the BTS Number of the target device BH NPU Management IP Address the IP address of the interface used for managing the site NPU to which the ASN GW is assigned Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager Click Apply to retrieve the data for all MSs served by the specified ASN GW The displayed data for all MSs served by the specified entity includes Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Data per MS served by the target device MS ID the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS The following buttons are now available Button Description Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data Home Click to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window Export List to CSV Click to open the Select Export Destination File allowing you to export the All MSs Data to a CSV file in a selectable location De Register All MSs Click to force de registration of all MSs served by the selected device Retrieve Selected MS Ful
199. e Device Site Sector RJ EMS_after 10 14 x Sa N D Site Sector 1 Site Sector Definition Name Heading o deg width o deg Site Sector Association BS IDLSB T au Number AU Port Number ODU Number ODU Port Number Antenna Number Antenna Port Number 88 22 11 2 i 1 1 i 1 D Done Figure 3 56 Site Sector lt gt Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The Site Sector page includes the following sections M Site Sector Definition M Site Sector Association in a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS M Site Sector Association in a Micro Outdoor BTS 3 9 2 1 Site Sector Definition The Site Sector Definition section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The sector name An optional descriptive string of up to 32 printable characters Heading The sector heading the center angle of the sector in degrees The range is from O to 359 The heading of an associated Sector cannot be changed The default is 0 Width The planned sector coverage in degrees The range is from 0 to 359 The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 9 2 2 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Sector Site Sector Association in a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The Site Sector Association table includes the following parameters for each site sector association configurable only when adding a new association Paramete
200. e Mode The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Port Tab Create ena ae EE faccseeveciesatedec sausawsvedetaveyerstdistdatindeviwedsadtanecmevenseeitierresvedst 201 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab Create sd da in SEENEN EE ege EA ENEE DEER EES E EE ged 202 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Profile Config Tab Create Mode The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab Create Mode 204 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page UL Reference Classification Rule Tab Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 211 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 241 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 5 44 Figure 5 45 Figure 5 46 Figure 5 47 249 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figures The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page ASN Hot Lining Tab 209 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Profiles Tab Create Mode 210 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Access List Tab Create Mode The BS Template Radio Basic Page General Def Tab AEN 213 The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab REENEN ENEE 216 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Base Band Tab 217 The BS Templ
201. e Name defined in the database for the BTS of the first BS First IP The Management IP Address of the BTS of the first BS First Location The Location defined in the database for the BTS of the second BS First Site The Name defined in the database for the BTS of the second BS First IP The Management IP Address of the BTS of the second BS 8 7 2 4 Custom Operations Menu Right click on selected entries in the Result Table to open the custom operations menu Except to Export operation all the following operations are available only in Custom mode Operation Description New Select to add a new Neighboring Definition entry You will be prompted to specify two BS IDs and a Neighboring Operation between them Report Fix or Delete The new definition will be added to the view with the chosen Neighboring Operation pending for the next run of the task Remove Select to remove a Neighboring Definition from the view This will not affect the actual Neighboring Definition in the devices database It will only remove the Neighboring Definition from the next run of the task in Custom mode Report Select to report the status of the selected Neighboring Definitions upon the next run of the task in Custom mode Fix Select to fix and or update relevant parameters in the selected Neighboring Definitions upon the next run of the task in Custom mode Delete Select to physically
202. e Name that already exists in the target managed objects From To Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled The range of values From To of the Destination ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 1 The default in the device is From 1 To 65535 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Enable TCP UDP Indicates whether the use of a range of Destination ports is enabled for Destination Port the classification rule The default is no If enabled then Enable IP Protocol for the same Classification Rule should be set to enable automatically enabled in the device Protocol should be set to either 6 TCP or 17 UDP 5 2 4 9 Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab avs cabin Rule Source Ae Gasstation Rude Destination Address Cast rabon Rude Source fat Gelz sen Rude Destinatia Port Gassin stn Rule Custorier VLAN ID l gt Mode Create ie Dekte pai x H Revert d Classification Config Name td Gassian Config Here a O Customer VLAN ID 1 Se hi Ratresh 1 v Sne Dore Figure 5 16 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule VLAN ID tab is applicable only for L2 rules The VLAN ID parameter of an existing rule cannot be modif
203. e Operational Control 2 shutdown operation No Action Lee Automatic Cedies Daly Bachup Tise Co 0 ele gi Be vi s Dore M Card Properties E Control Figure 3 21 NPU Page The NPU page includes the following HM Automatic Configuration Backup Card Properties The Card Properties section includes the following read only parameters of the NPU card Parameter Description Slot Number The number of the slot allocated to the NPU card In current release the NPU can be installed only in slot 5 Installed The status of the NPU card installation Must be Yes Serial Number The serial number of the NPU card HW Version Number The hardware version of the NPU card HW Revision Number The hardware revision number Operational SW Version Number The version of the default software image used for rebooting the NPU after system reset Shadow SW Version Number The version of the downloaded software image that can be used to boot up the NPU Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Current Running SW Source The software that is currently running on the system Operational or Shadow Refer to Software Upgrade Task on page 298 for details on loading a new SW version and managing the SW versions 3 6 1 2 2 Control The Control section includes the Shutdown Operation action parameter that enables defin
204. e default is O Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR Uplink Unsolicited Grant Interval ms The nominal interval in ms between successive data grant opportunities for this uplink service flow The range is 0 65535 The default is O the default in the device is 20 Must be lower than Uplink Max Latency Relevant only for uplink service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Downlink Min Reserved The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for downlink traffic carried Traffic Rate Kbps by the service flow The range is 0 40000 The default is O the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Downlink Max Latency The maximum latency in ms allowed in the downlink service flow The ms range is 0 4294967295 The default is O the default in the device is 500 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Downlink Tolerated Jitter the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this downlink ms service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 0
205. e in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 In DHCP Server mode the DHCP server IP address must be in the same subnet but outside the range allocated for users address pool as provisioned in the DHCP Server Configurable only when creating a new Service Group The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value Enable Service VLAN Applicable only for IP Service Groups with an attached VLAN service interface Indicates the status of a VLAN service interface attached to the service group Not configurable when the attached Service Interface is IP in IP If a Service Group with Service VLAN enabled is attached to a Service Profile Service VLAN cannot be disabled The default is Disable MS MS Loopback Applicable only for IP Service Groups Indicates whether MS MS loopback is enabled or disabled for the service interface The default is Enable VID Mapping Range Start Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The start value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping The default is 0 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of other existing VPWS M
206. e new Service Group This means that you have first to run a Multiple Configuration task using a template containing the relevant Service Group in Delete Mode and after successful completion of this task run another Multiple Configuration task using a different template containing the relevant Service Interface in Delete Mode Updating Scalars In a tab with scalar parameters select the parameters to be updated by marking the check box to the left a parameter name and configure the required value for each selected parameter Parameters that were not selected will not be affected You can select one or several parameters to be used for filtering by selecting the parameter s clicking on each parameter name that will change to italics font blue color and configuring the filtering value The selected criteria name and filtering value for each filtering parameter will be displayed in the Filters area Only devices in which the current configuration match all filtering criteria will be updated using configured values of parameters that were selected for update without being defined as filters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template 5 2 ASN GW Template The ASN GW Template comprises the following pages E AAA Page M Service Group Page HM QoS Marking Page M SFA Page H Service Profile Page Hot Lining Page 5 2 1 AAA Page The AAA page comprises the following tabs E AAA Cl
207. e or several devices from the Source Equipment table select the device s to be removed and click on the Remove button 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Sei Chapter 8 Tasks Restore Configuration Task 8 3 Restore Configuration Task In the Local CRAFT Utility the Restore Configuration Task is applicable only to the managed device The Restore Configuration task enables loading a configuration file to a target device The configuration file can be one of the following BR A backup configuration file previously retrieved from the target device E An offline e configuration file previously prepared for the target device using the Mass Configuration Wizard The task also enables loading a vendor configuration file to selected devices A vendor configuration file includes vendor parameters that cannot be configured by the configuration tools available to the customer If for any reason the vendor will decide that any of these parameters should be modified the applicable customers will be notified and a special file that includes the necessary modifications shall be sent to them mo To open the Restore Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following M To open a new task use the Task Wizard M To open an existing task select an existing Restore Configuration task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime resu
208. e provisioning or if received profile descriptor is disabled unauthenticated mode Up to 63 additional Service Profiles may be created 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The Service Profile node enables creating deleting service profiles refer to Creating Deleting a Service Profile below and opening the Service Profile page for one of the existing service profiles refer to Service Profile Page By default the list is sorted by the order of Service Profiles creation time 3 7 5 3 1 Creating Deleting a Service Profile gt To create a new service profile 1 Right click the Service Profile sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New Service Profile window Service Profile Service Profile Name Service Profile Enable Disable ES J Figure 3 38 New Service Profile Window A Inthe New Service Profile window define the Service Profile Name 1 30 characters and click Apply The new service profile will be added to the list of service profiles available under the Service Profile sub node with the default status of Disable 3 To configure the parameters of the new service profile click on the service profile name in the navigation tree to open the Service Profile page for this service profile Up to a maximum of 64 service profiles can be created ke To delete a Service Profile 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD U
209. e range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 7 see 64 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 28 Allowed Interference Level Correction of maximum allowed UL MCS based on measured DL CINR The options are Very High High Medium Low The default is Very High the default in the device is High 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D C Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 2 4 Beam Forming Tab applicable only for Macro BTS Ranging Feedback Alncations Power Control Beam Ferming Management Qas Mode ese Update ekte Piters By chching on a selected property name you can add R to ths fitert L Calbeation attenuate D ee SS Doe J Figure 5 31 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Beam Forming Tab The Beam Forming parameter is Parameter Description Calibration Attenuator Not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS Applicable only for Beam Forming DL Diversity Mode The calibration attenuation used to help mitigate potential out of band interference to beam forming calibration caused by other base stations The options are No Attenuation Used Low Attenuation High Attenuation The default is No Attenuation Used the default in the device is Low Attenuation 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Cd Ch
210. earer Interface page is applicable for Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GW The ASN GW Bearer Interface page enables managing the parameters of the Bearer IP Interface that enables connectivity between ASN GW and BSs AAA server and Home Agent 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D amp Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity P ASN GW Bearer Interface Baseer Interface Source IP Addons TC wwes Subnet Mask eessen E Defauk Gateway VLAN ID ii Number of MS imtation s Maan ASN GIW Through me S moos Number of Active MS Average UL D b rate via Backhaud Ethernet port le ci Betresh wi Anc Dore Figure 3 17 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page The ASN GW Bearer Interface page includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 172 16 0 1 A change in this parameter will affect all entries in the IP Routing table using the Bearer Interface Source IP Address as the Destination For details refer to Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters on page 36 Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway The Default Gateway for the Bearer interface Note Any change of this parameter will affect all entries in the IP Routing table using the Bearer Interface Default Gateway as the Next Hop address For details
211. east significant bits in R3 TLV E LSB The whole 16 bit value of the relevant TLV will be transferred without any change when transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side and from R6 to R3 The default is MSB Shift 5 2 2 Service Group Page The Service Group page comprises the following tabs M Service Interfaces Tab M Service Groups Tab 5 2 2 1 Service Interfaces Tab Service Irkerl aces Service Groups Mode Cexe Updete Delte pad Kr CP Revert d Service interface Name C Servie Interface Name 5i O Description SE Gem Gs LH Figure 5 5 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab Create Mode The Service Interfaces table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description ld The automatically generated index number of the entry Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface The Service Interfaces Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing Service Interface cannot be updated in Update Mode the Service Interface Name is used as the Service In
212. ed in the MS profile or obtains the IP address from HA using the mobile IP The default is Proxy 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Se oO Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Service Interface Name Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service group Applicable only for IP and VPLS Service Groups Mandatory for Create Mode of an IP or VPLS Service Group The referenced Service Interface must exist in the database of the relevant managed object Only a VPLS Trunk Service Interface can be associated with a VPLS Service Group A VPLS Trunk Service Interface cannot be associated with any other Service Group type Note that a Service Interface can be associated only to a single Service Group The default is an empty string which is not a valid value Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode The lease time in seconds of IP address allocated for MS from this Service Group In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The range is 24 4294967295 The default is 24 the default in the device is 86 400 DHCP Own IP Address Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service group Applicable only for IP Service Groups Mandatory for Create Mode of an IP Service Group The DHCP Own IP Address of an existing Service Group
213. eeneneseneeenseneeaneeseneeeesnaneeees 47 Management Page SNMP Managers Tab ee 49 Management Page Performance Tab scscceeseeeeeneeeeeeneneeeeneeeeeeseeeneeeeseteeeneneenenes 51 Management Page Logging Tat euer gek eeieeengeee eebe ee ENEE ee eebe 54 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page eeuCSECREKEEEESEEEEEERREEEERREEEEERRRENEEEREEEEEEREEEEESRNEEEREEEESEN 56 Keep Alive Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS 58 ASN GW Pools P32 Ernis e a a em aaa 60 P wer SUP DIY Page iriiietep an E a a aaia 61 NPU PaO E 63 New AU WO EE 66 AU lt Type and Slot gt Page Card Properties Tab Macro BIS 67 AU Slot Page Control Tab EE 69 New ODU WINGO EE 72 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Figures RI 73 ee AT 76 GPS Page Macro Indoor BS sicsevccecanesreeasactenncedanaccascsnusncdencdishesakatedencantamasasdedncantecias 79 Power Feeder Pace wives ccic tuner enone ee E 85 Antenna Page i cst costes tees epee sae ce A E E 86 ABA PAGO E E Eege H 90 Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab Add Service Interface 93 Serv
214. eir default values allowing if applicable modification to other values Configure the required parameters At this stage the change is applied only to the display and the displayed parameters of the new entry are colored green The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button _ To delete one or several entities if applicable Select the entities you want to delete and click on the Delete button At this stage the change is applied only to the display and the displayed parameters of the entries to be deleted are colored red The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Introduction to Device Management 3 2 Introduction to Device Management The tree menu in the navigation pane of the Device Manager window enables selecting the following view and configuration pages E Equipment View Page on page 17 M Site Page on page 22 HM Connectivity L1 L2 Connectivity Page on page 28 Management Page on page 33 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 55 Keep Alive Page on page 57 ASN GW Pools Page on page 59 M Equipment Shelf Power Supply Page on page 61 NPU Page on page 62 AU on page 65 with an AU lt Type and Slot gt Page for each created AU External ODU on page 71 Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS with an
215. emplates For example if you want to create a new Service Group associated with a new Service Interface the Service Interface must exist in the target objects before you can create the new Service Group This means that you have first to run a Multiple Configuration task using a template containing the new Service Interface in Create Mode and after successful completion of this task run another Multiple Configuration task using a different template containing the new Service Group in Create Mode Managing Tables in Update Mode Each row in the table has one or more parameters that provides a unique identification of the entry In Update mode the row identifiers are not mandatory and will be displayed only for saved entries selected for filtering or update To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row will be added to the table and a row configuration editor will open on the right side enabling you to configure the row parameters Select the parameters to be configured by marking the check box to the left a parameter name and configure the required value for each selected parameter Parameters that were not selected will not be affected You can select one or several parameters to be used for filtering by selecting the parameter s clicking on each parameter name that will change to italics font blue color and configuring the filtering value The selected criteria name and filtering value for each filtering paramete
216. ent Management Interface SNMP Managers Performance External Managererk Interlace Source ip Adress Subnet Mask Next Hop Gateway visn ID 12 802 1P Priority i Dep EE c gt Betresh e Ai Dore Figure 3 10 Management Page Management Interface Tab Micro BTS The Management Interface tab for Micro BTS includes the parameters of the Management Interface Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 192 168 1 1 Subnet MAsk The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 Next Hop Gateway The Next Hop Default Gateway for the Management interface VLAN ID The VLAN ID of management traffic The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 12 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si Es Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description 802 1P Priority The 802 1P VLAN Priority of management traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 DSCP The DSCP of management traffic The range is 0 63 The default is 0 3 5 2 2 QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTSs The QoS Marking Rules tab enables defining the rules that classify the signaling and management traffic originating from the NPU into different flows and 802 1p VLAN Priority and or DSCP values to be applied on traffic that match the criteria defined by the applicable classifica
217. ent Template Shelf Page Shutdown Power AU to ODU Tab Macro BTS Figures Figure 6 1 Specific Parameters File Example Leen 264 Figure 6 2 Specific Parameters File Example 2 265 Figure 6 3 Specific Parameters File Example 3 REENEN ENNEN 266 Figure 6 4 Mass Configuration Wizard Number of BSs Mismatch Message 268 Figure 6 5 Mass Configuration Wizard Invalid Unique Parameters Message 268 Figure 7 1 The Performance Monitoring Viewer 271 Figure 8 1 Performance Collection Task Editor General Tab NENNEN 289 Figure 8 2 Performance Collection Task Editor Entities Tab RENE 290 Figure 8 3 Performance Collection Task Editor Actions Tab 291 Figure 8 4 Backup Task Editor escacssesseerensinyoueciusdennmuesasat cs taencrealuandesmenteeinactcnataneennnmemuteaceaetien 293 Figure 8 5 Restore Task EE 296 Figure 8 6 Software Upgrade Task Editor BTS Software Upgrade 299 Figure 8 7 Software Upgrade Task Editor AU Software Upgrade 301 Figure 8 8 File Data Aging Task Elte eegenen 304 Fig re 8 9 CL Task e EE 305 Figure 8 10 Mutual Neighboring Task WiNndOW cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeesaaaeeeseaeeeeeaes 307 Figure 8 11 Mutual Neighboring Task Report cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeegeeesenseneseeeeesees 310 Figure 8 12 Configuration History Backup and Aging Task Editor AN 311 Figure 9 1 BTS EE 313 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 1
218. entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the Data ASN GW full details for the selected MS 4 1 3 Single MS De Registration The Single MS De Registration option is used to force de registration of a specific MS Sytem Managed Network Tak Management Configuration Management Service Provisioning Administradon SecurRy Management Help 3 Altoer manager x d Decovery settings x D reckmanager x Qt manager x Al petz ste x apt network mantensnce x Lieber cl a E SST Network Markenance Server 10 10 107 117 User odan Figure 4 3 Network Maintenance Single MS De Registration 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager To force de registration of a specific MS enter the ASN GW IP Address of the ASN GW currently serving the MS Bearer IP address and the MS Outer NAI the complete NAI a string of up to 253 characters such as am 1 4efd450727234884ad6bf3db0d68c077 company com The settings of the MS identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server Click Apply to force de registration of the specified MS You can click Home to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window 4 1 4 All MSs De Registration The All MSs De Registration option is used to force de registration of all MSs served by a specific device System Managed Network at Mansgement Configuration Management Service P
219. equired for transmitting CDMA reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CQI 8 to Required C N Level for CQI 7 see CQI parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 9 QPSK 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CDMA 16 to Required C N Level for CDMA 14 see CDMA parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 13 QPSK 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 14 see QPSK 1 2 parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 16 16 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for transmitting 16 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 7 see QPSK 3 4 parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 19 16 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 16 QAM 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level
220. er R3 Data path UL unicast R3 total data path UL unicast packets packets counter R3 Data path UL total R3 total data path UL packets packets counter 7 6 9 R6 Interface BS Counters R6 Interface BS counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs R6 Interface BS counters provide information on the total datapath traffic per BS over R6 interface R6 Interface BS counters are available for each existing BS with traffic over R6 interface at least one registered MS The available R6 Interface BS counters are Parameter EMS Name Counts the Number of used as part of BS identifier The Bearer IP Address used as part of BS identifier The Bearer BS ID R6 BS Data path DL bytes counter R6 BS data path DL bytes R6 BS Data path DL unicast packets counter R6 BS data path DL unicast packets R6 BS Data path DL total packets counter R6 BS data path DL packets R6 BS Data path UL bytes counter R6 BS data path UL bytes R6 BS Data path UL unicast packets counter R6 BS data path UL unicast packets R6 BS Data path UL total packets counter R6 BS data path UL packets 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Se Gei Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer BS Counters Groups 7 7 BS Counters Groups The BS counter groups are applicable for each existing BS The BS Counters Groups include WR R1 Interface Traff
221. er 2011 Bearer Interface Page Address Updated configuration rules for VLAN ID Updated default of Number of MS limitation to 3000 Updated default of Maximum ASN GW Throughput to 500 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Managing a Single Device L1 L2 Updated default value of External Ether Type to September 2011 Connectivity Page 8100 Managing a Single Device Service Updated default and improved description for September 2011 Group Page Service Groups Tab Vendor Class Identifier Configuring Templates The ASN GW_ Improved description for Vendor Class Identifier September 2011 Te i P Servi a oo SNE Renewal Time Rebind Time Offer Reuse Time H Server Host Name Vendor Class Identifier Vendor Specific Information Name Vendor Specific Information Value Client Boot File Name are applicable also for DHCP Server mode Managing a Single Device R6 R8 Authentication Tab removed Suspended EAP September 2011 Bearer Interface Page Process and Maximum EAP Rounds thresholds removed not supported Default Authenticator IP Address and Active MSs moved to Bearer Tab Configuring Templates The BS Removed Suspended EAP Process Maximum September 2011 Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab EAP Rounds Configuring Templates The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ASNGW Pools Ta Updated default value
222. er 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Classification Rule Number The index number of the Classification rule An auto sequential number starting from 1 up to a maximum of 100 rules generated automatically during rule creation Name The name of the rule By default the table is sorted by the order of Classification Rules creation time click once on the table s Name header to sort by ascending order click again to sort by descending order click again to return to default sorting Type The type of the rule L2 or L3 Select an entry to open the Classification Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Classification Rule Adds a new entry to the Classification Rules table and opens the Classification Rule Parameters Editor allowing to configure parameters of the new rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Classificaton Rules table The Classification Rule Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Rule Identifiers Name The name of the classification rule A string of 1 30 characters The name of an existing rule cannot be modified PHS Rule Name The Packet Header Suppression PHS rule name associated with the classification rule or null for no PHS Rule Spec
223. erator ID must be used by all BSs in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 The default Operator ID is 255 243 41 Once the user enters a new ID for the first created BS it becomes the new default for new BSs 3 Click OK The new BS will be added to the list of BS available in the BS node 4 To complete the creation of the new BS you should select the newly added BS entry and complete the configuration of the mandatory Bandwidth and Central frequency parameters see Radio Basic Page General Tab on page 130 After clicking Apply you will be prompted to configure some additional mandatory parameters in the Airframe Structure General tab and Air Frame Structure Zones tab After configuring the requested parameters click Apply again ke To copy an existing BS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS 1 The Copy BS feature enables creation of a new BS based on the configuration of an existing BS To copy a BS right click the BS node in the navigation tree and select Copy BS to open the BS Selector window 2 From the list of available BSs select the BS you want to copy and click Select The Copy BS window will open with the values of the source BS used for BS ID LSB and Operator ID parameters Copy BS BS ID LSB Operator ID Bearer IP Center Frequency Cell ID Preamble Group Segment Number
224. erface Local Management Interface Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters 3 5 2 1 1 1 Connectivity Mode The Connectivity Mode section enables separation of the bearer IP and NMS IP domains through definition of the connectivity mode The following NMS connectivity modes are available for selection Parameter Description In Band When In Band mode is selected the VLAN is used to differentiate between the bearer and external NMS IP domains on the DATA port The bearer VLAN is used for the bearer IP domain and the external management VLAN is used for the external NMS IP domain The MGNT port and CSCD Cascade port are assigned to the local management VLAN in this connectivity mode The CSCD port is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ei D ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Out of Band When Out of Band mode is selected the bearer and external NMS IP domains are separated at the Ethernet interface The DATA port and bearer VLAN is used for the bearer IP domain and the MGMT port and external management VLAN is used for external NMS connectivity The CSCD port is assigned to the local management VLAN The CSCD port is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS Unified When Unified mode is selected the bearer IP domain and external NMS IP domain are unified on the DATA port meaning that the same IP ad
225. et Mask see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 55 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual si D ES 3 5 2 1 13 3 5 2 1 1 4 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Next Hop Gateway The Next Hop Default Gateway for the External Management interface Note Any change of this parameter will affect all entries in the IP Routing table using the External Management Next Hop Gateway as the Next Hop address For details refer to Section 3 5 2 1 1 4 below VLAN ID The VLAN ID of external management traffic The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 12 In a Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and Mini Centralized ASN GW if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified the VLAN ID is not configurable and is set to the value configured for the ASN GW Bearer Interface VLAN ID see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 55 When operating in In Band Connectivity Mode if the value is other than the default 12 it will be indicated in the Backhaul VLAN Translation table see Backhaul VLAN Translation on page 31 Local Management Interface The Local Management Interface section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 172 31 0 1 A change in this parameter will affect the relevant rules for ACL 199 see ACL Tab on page 40 and IP Routing see
226. euse 3 E if Segment Number see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab on page 132 is 0 then only bits 0 and 1 should be set checked Configure 000011 E if Segment Number is 1 then only bits 2 and 3 should be set checked Configure 001100 E if Segment Number is 2 then only bits 4 and 5 should be set checked Configure 110000 Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW INFORMATION The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz To delete a BS To delete a BS right click the required BS entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation NOTE An associated BS specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector lt gt Page on page 158 3 8 2 To delete a BS from its neighbors To delete a BS from its neighbors without deleting it entirely right click the BS entry in the navigation tree and select Delete from neighboring Radio The Radio node includes the following pages 4Motion and
227. eve the current configuration of the source device s The file will be created by the device upon getting the request from the management system E Backup an older device configuration Select to retrieve one of the previously created configuration files available in the database of the source device s The Source Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The device s number Site ID as configured in the device BTS Name The name of the device as configured in the device NE Type The device type IP Address The IP address of the device File Available only for Site Configuration backup task if the selected option is Backup an older device configuration The name of the file to be retrieved from the device Click on the Add button to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Source Equipment table Select the device s to participate in the task right click and select the Select option or double click on a selected single device For Site Configuration backup task if the selected option is Backup an older device configuration a File Name drop down menu for each entry allows you to select the file that will participate in the task Each File Name includes its creation date and time To remove on
228. evice SFA Page Classification Rules Tab Updated Classification Rule Number Name September 2011 Managing a Single Device Service Updated general description list order is by September 2011 Profile creation time Managing a Single Device Service Updated Flow ID Reference Service Group September 2011 Profile Page Reference Classification Rule Name Configuring Templates The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page UL DL Reference Classification Rule Tabs Updated Rule Name September 2011 Managing a Single Device L1 L2 Updated configuration rules for AU September 2011 Connectivity Page Macro Indoor BTS Maintenance VLAN ID Managing a Single Device Radio Removed Alarm Thresholds for Downlink September 2011 Advanced Page Management Tab Dropped Packets Ratio thresholds Best Effort RT VR NRT VR UGS ERT VR Configuring Templates The BS Removed Alarm Thresholds for Downlink September 2011 Template Radio Advanced Page Dropped Packets Ratio thresholds Best Effort Management Tab RT VR NRT VR UGS ERT VR Enabling Discovery Added details for Micro Outdoor BTS September 2011 Managing a Single Device AU Slot Updated Shutdown Operation for Micro September 2011 Page Control Tab Outdoor BTS Configuring Templates Equipment New template s MO September 2011 Template 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued
229. evice is public 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Management Template Parameter Description Enable Site Traps Indicates whether the sending of traps to the management station is enabled or disabled The default is enable 5 4 2 Performance Page The Performance page comprises the Connectivity ASN GW Counters and BS Counters tabs ConnectivbyjASh GW counters BS Counters Mode ie Update late Piters By ciching on a selected property name you can add R to this Per P Add x gt Revert Id Performance Groups Activation Bl d Performance Grougrs Activation Backhad Poet v O Grow Activation D gh Refresh vi Se ks Figure 5 41 The Management Template Performance Page Connectivity ASN GW Counters Tab Only the Update Mode is applicable for the Counters tables The Counters tables includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Performance Group The Counters Group to be activated deactivated according to selected Activation group in the Row Editor The Counters Row Editors includes the following parameters Parameter Description Performance Group The Counters Group to be activated deactivated Activation 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 5 4 3 5 4 3 1 Chapter 5
230. evices The selected devices are automatically included in the Equipment tab of the Multiple Config task Refer to Multiple Configuration Template Based Task in the Infrastructure User Manual Backup Configuration Opens a Configuration Backup Task for the selected device s Available only if the Operational State of all selected devices is Enabled Refer to Backup Configuration Task on page 292 Configuration History Opens the Configuration History Request window for the selected device Not available if two or more devices are selected For more details refer to Configuration History Request and Report on page 8 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D e Chapter 2 Using the Equipment Manager Configuration History Request and Report 2 2 Configuration History Request and Report The Configuration History Request window enables defining the time interval and filtering parameters for a Configuration History Report detailing the relevant changes in the configuration of a selected device To open the Configuration History Request window In the Equipment Manager select the relevant device right click on the entry and select the Configuration History option in the pop up window The Configuration History Request window opens Configuration History Request Interval Start Date 16 24 58 2011 09 22 End Date 17 24 58 2011 09 22 w Filter SYSTEM logs LJ Summ
231. ew The Sectors view shows text boxes for the defined Site Sectors The name of a defined Sector is displayed in the relevant area Note that the name can also be an empty string null It is recommended to define a Sector Name for all defined sectors to provide clear distinction between site sectors Click on a Sector s text box to view relevant associations A blue background will be added to the selected Sector as well as to the ODU s and AU channel s associated with it if applicable Double click on any of the Site Sectors to open the specific site sector configuration page External Devices View The External Devices View below the Chassis View displays information related to external devices connected to the BTS In the current release the applicable devices are GPS and if defined Power Feeder s Power Feeders are not applicable for a Macro Outdoor BTS The GPS indication includes the status of the signal received from the GPS equipment If GPS is not configured the GPS status indication is marked gray Double click on the GPS status indication to open the GPS configuration page refer to GPS Page on page 78 The status indication of a defined Power Feeder PF is always green Double click on the Power Feeder status indication to open the Power Feeder configuration page refer to Power Feeder Page on page 84 Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Equipment View page provides a graphical view of t
232. ex Configurable only if Negotiation mode is Manual The default is Full Duplex 3 5 2 Management Page The Management page comprises the following tabs Management Interface Tab QoS Marking Rules Tab ACL Tab SNMP Managers Tab Performance Tab Logging Tab E Oo E E IP Routing Tab E E E 3 5 2 1 Management Interface Tab The Management Interface tab enables viewing modifying the connectivity mode and parameters of management IP interface s This section includes HM Management Interface Tab for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW HM Management Interface Tab for Micro Outdoor BTS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 3 5 2 1 1 Management Interface Tab for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 EMS_after_offline on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment 5 Management Management Inkerface QoS Marking ades ACL IP Routing Stem Managers Performance Logang Connecthaty Mode intend O Out of Band uriied External Management Interface Local Management Interface Sosu IP address T as Scarce IP address 33 33 33 33 EEN Dees Leet Mask EE Wan ID rR Next Hop Gaterray C ioina E E ele 1 Retreat Zer Dore Figure 3 9 Management Page Management Interface Tab Macro BTS The Management Interface tab for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW includes the following sections Connectivity Mode External Management Int
233. f the header to be suppressed 0 20 The default is null Must be configured to a valid value An existing PHS Rule cannot be modified The following buttons are available at the bottom of the page Button Description Add PHS Rule Adds a new entry to the PHS Rules table allowing to configure parameters of the new rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the PHS Rules table A PHS Rule that is associated to a Classification Rule cannot be deleted 3 7 5 2 Classification Rules Tab The Classification Rules tab enables defining the rules that are used to classify packets transmitted on the bearer plane ronn Name ie Classification Rule Identifiers 1 bp D Name 2 udp 3 d K CG PHS Rube Name 4 t Di Prieety a Ia 5 DI 3 SSS el OP eae Clscaficstion Rule Parameters Layer2 Leet Customer VLAN T GG Enable TCP LOP Source Port TOL Source Port From i L mer Gi Enable TCP UDP Destination Port O Enable 1P Tos TCP UDP Destination Port From 3 TOS Range fron 0 n o 3 c Seel e m Dore GI Figure 3 37 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab The Classification Rules tab includes the Classification Rules table and the Classification Rule Parameters Editor section The Classification Rules table includes the following read only parameters for each existing rule 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapt
234. fault TFTP server is used see below he drop down menu enables selecting one of the relevant files available in the default firmware folder lf another TFTP server is selected see below the drop down menu enables selecting one of the relevant files available in the root directory Otherwise you should manually specify the full path and file name TFTP IP Address The IP address of the TFTP server on which the file to be downloaded is stored This address is set by default to the management system s internal TFTP server IP address but can be changed to any external TFTP server IP address If you select two or three actions then each action will take place only after the successful completion of the previous action selecting only the Download to Shadow and Set as Operational Version options is not a valid combination The selected action s will be performed on the devices included in the Select Equipment section Click on the Add button to open equipment selector for adding devices to the table If Download to Shadow action was selected the equipment selector will include only relevant managed devices according to the type of the selected software file Macro BTSs and Mini Centralized ASN GW for an npu file Micro Outdoor BTSs for an AU Micro file The information displayed for each selected device includes details of the Shadow Operational and Current versions Click on the Remove button to delete selected entries from the
235. fining the properties of required PIU and PSU cards and viewing the properties of installed cards D Power Supply PIU Card Properties 1 Slottunber Requeed Feed Operational Required HW Ver Installed HW Ver fi es Not nstaled netzen Saamp R Yes Inctaled Active swamp ware PSU Card Properties IT Setnunber Reawed Feed Operations 1 Not wetalied Down k Yes Irstaled Operational 3 Yes Installed Operational al Yes Installed Operational ele Lo Bett w m Dore J Figure 3 20 Power Supply Page The Power Supply page includes the following sections RW PIU Card Properties M PSU Card Properties 3 6 1 1 1 PIU Card Properties Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment The PIU Card Properties table includes the following parameters for each PIU card slot Parameter Description Slot Number Read only The number of the slot allocated to the PIU card 1 2 Required Indicates whether the PIU card is required in the specific slot Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options Yes No The default is Yes Installed Read only The status of the PIU card installation Installed or Not installed Operational Read only The operational status of the PIU card Active or Inactive Required HW Version The required current supply capability of the card Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displ
236. for Mini Centralized ASN GWs Management Provisioned QoS counters provide information on the provisioned QoS parameters The available Management Provisioned QoS counters are Counter Name Counts the Total provisioned DL MIR during reading Total provisioned DL MIR to all services Total provisioned DL CIR during reading Total provisioned DL CIR to all services Total provisioned DL UGS MIR during reading Total provisioned DL MIR to all UGS services Total provisioned DL UGS CIR during reading Total provisioned DL CIR to all UGS services Total provisioned DL eRT MIR during reading Total provisioned DL MIR to all ERT services Total provisioned DL eRT CIR during reading Total provisioned DL CIR to all ERT services Total provisioned DL RT MIR during readin Total provisioned DL MIR to all RT services p g g Total provisioned DL RT CIR during reading Total provisioned DL CIR to all RT services p g Total provisioned DL nRT MIR during reading Total provisioned DL MIR to all NRT services 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ei D 7 6 4 7 6 5 Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer ASN GW Counters Groups Counter Name Counts the Total provisioned DL nRT CIR during reading Total provisioned DL CIR to all NRT services Total provisioned DL BE MIR during reading Total provisioned DL MIR to all BE services Total provisioned UL MIR
237. for both ASN GW Primary Pool and ASN GW Secondary Pool The ASN GW Secondary Pool can be enabled only if the ASN GW Primary Pool is enabled and includes at least one entry Note that if both pools are disabled or if the enabled pool s are empty the ASN GW load balancing feature is disabled and only the Default Authenticator will be used Each Pool table displays the following read only parameters for each defined ASN GW Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the ASN GW Connectivity Status Read only The status of connectivity with the ASN GW Unknown Up down The keep alive mechanism starts only after first registration at the ASN GW Until then this mechanism is disable and connectivity status is Unknown 3 8 3 2 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab enables defining Bearer Plan QoS rules dei R6 R8 Bearer Interface 255 243 41 11 11 11 Bearer Qos Mating Ruder Bearer Traflic QoS Rides Rule aber Rule Status Marking Rule Quis Rule Parareters a he Mee Rude Ratus Enable v Condition Service Flow Data Delivery Type ANF v Servier Flow Traffic Priory Ar DN LI Enable Service Flow Media Flow Type Service Flow Modis Flow Type Action Outer DSCP Marking a DIS 1p Prioety Marking 0 Irkra ASN Traffik QoS Rules Diffsery Code bot TE A SO Ip Priority bo bel ME d Betrest wi Ach Refreshing Figure 3 54 R6 R8 Bea
238. g Task The Configuration History Backup and Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining Configuration History data in the database Configuration History data is kept in the database to support the Configuration History Request and Report feature see Configuration History Request and Report on page 8 This is a system task that cannot be deleted To open the FConfiguration History Backup and Aging Task Editor select the task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the entry Configuration History Aging Task Task Configuration Threshold value Time Unit OBO pe kel D on Figure 8 12 Configuration History Backup and Aging Task Editor The Threshold Value parameter sets the maximum time in months to maintain the configuration history data in the database If when running the task there is configuration history data for which the elapsed time since it was added to the database is higher than this value this old data will be deleted from the database and saved in lt NMS gt filesystem AuditBackup The range is from 1 to 6 months The default is 3 months 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual gt OO Chapter 9 The File Manager In This Chapter M The File Manager on page 313 M BTS File Manager on page 313 RW Offline Configuration File Manager on page 315 9 1 9 1 1 Chapter 9 The File Manager T
239. g box allowing you to define the properties of the AU required for the slot Refer to Creating Deleting an AU on page 65 for more details 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 3 1 3 3 3 1 4 3 3 1 5 3 3 2 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page M Click on an installed AU port to view relevant associations if applicable A blue background will be added to the selected AU Port as well as to the ODU and Site Sector associated with it Outdoor Units View The Outdoor Units view shows the ODU icons all the Outdoor Units up to 28 for Macro Indoor BTS up to 24 for Macro Outdoor BTS that can be defined An undefined ODU is marked in gray A defined ODU is marked in either green or red indicating its operational status Note that the operational status of an ODU can be OK Up only if there are no alarms If you create an ODU and do not associate it see Site Sector lt gt Page on page 158 it will be marked in green however it will not be operational If the ODU exists and is associated meaning that it is reachable its ports configuration 1x1 or 4x2 will be indicated on the left side Click on an associated ODU s icon to view relevant associations A blue background will be added to the selected ODU as well as to the AU ODU connectors AU channels and Site Sector associated with it Double click on any of the defined ODUs to open the specific ODU configuration page Sectors Vi
240. gement Ethernet port Parameter Description Operational State Read only The operational status of the Ethernet port Unlock Up or Lock Down Administrative State The administrative status of the port Unlock Up or Lock Down Not configurable if Connectivity Mode see Section 3 5 2 1 1 1 is set to Out Of Band The default is Unlock Negotiation The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual The default is Auto Port Speed The port speed to be used for the physical interface The available options are 10 and 100 Mbps Configurable only if Negotiation is set to Manual The default is 100 Mbps Duplex Mode The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Duplex Configurable only if Negotiation is set to Manual The default is Full Duplex 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description External VLAN ID Read only The VLAN ID of external management traffic The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 12 For configuration details refer to External Management Interface VLAN ID see Section 3 5 2 1 1 2 3 5 1 1 4 External Ether Type Parameter Description External Ether Type Not applicable for a BTS operating in Centralized ASN Topology The Layer 2 Ether Type configures the
241. gle Device BS Current BS 3 3 3 Add Neighboring Completed with errors BS 35 3 6 Failed E BS 3 3 3 Update Neighbor BS 35 3 6 Completed 9 BS 35 3 6 Update Neighbor BS 3 3 3 Failed Associated AU is not healthy BS 35 3 7 Failed E BS 3 3 3 Update Neighbor BS 35 3 7 Completed i 9 BS 35 3 7 Update Neighbor BS 3 3 3 Failed Associated AU is not healthy B view report Figure 3 47 Neighboring Task Runtime Results with Errors Operation Add Neighbor After closing the Runtime Results window the summary results for each neighbor are indicated in the task s window Position the mouse over a selected result to get a tool tip with detailed results Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighboring Current BS Neighbor ing List BTS Name Operator ID 3 0 255 243 41 35 3 6 255 243 EE a ompletedWithErrors Figure 3 48 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighbor Failed operations can be fixed later using the Mutual Neighboring task Refer to Mutual Neighboring Task on page 307 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual e ei 3 8 2 2 3 8 2 2 1 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Radio Advanced Page The Radio Advanced page includes the following tabs M Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab M Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab M Radio Advanced Page Management Tab M Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab The Feedback tab en
242. guring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Rule Applied on Interface Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The type of interface for which the bearer plane QoS rule is defined Internal R4 R6 tunnel External R1 or ANY The default is Internal the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Data Delivery Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule Type The type of service provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR or ANY The default is UGS the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The traffic priority provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule 0 7 or ANY The default is 0 the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Media Flow Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule Type The media type provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule A string of 1 to 30 characters A value of ANY indicates that this parameter will be ignored The default is null the default in the device is ANY Outer DSCP Marking The Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value to be used for marking the packets if the packet complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from O to 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p pr
243. h from Updates the information displayed in the page according to current Device values acquired from the device Refresh Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the database Apply Implements the modifications to the configuration of the device Exiting the Device Manager or switching to another page without applying discards the changes This button is not available in information pages that display read only details and do not include any configurable parameters 3 1 4 Working with Configuration Tables In some pages tables are used for displaying information and for configuring and managing multiple entities of the same type Grayed out cells are read only o To modify the configuration of an existing entity 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager Double click on the applicable cell In a text cell edit the content In some cells a drop down menu will open enabling selection of the required option Click on any other cell to apply the change to the selected cell At this stage the change is applied only to the display and the displayed parameters of the modified entry are colored blue The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button gt To add a new entity if applicable Click on the Add button A new row will be added Some parameters may be set to th
244. he MS the IP address that was received from AAA in the MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address received in the MS profile or obtains the IP address from HA using the mobile IP Configurable only when creating a new Service Group The default is Server Note that upon selection of the Relay option the other parameters available in the Editors change to reflect the unique functionality of this mode Service Time W O IP Applicable only for IP Service Groups Time of waiting for DHCP request Address when initial Data Path is established If expires MS should be deregistered The range is O to 86 400 seconds A value of 0 means this timer is deactivated and MS is not deregistered The default is 0 Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups Not applicable in DHCP Relay mode The lease time in seconds of IP address allocated for MS from this Service Group The range is 24 4294967295 The default is 86 400 In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description DHCP Own IP Address Applicable only for IP Service Groups The IP address of the DHCP server relay proxy Must be different from other instances of DHCP Own IP Address in the device For a service group using a VLAN service interface should b
245. he File Manager The File Manager The File Manager enables viewing details and managing different types of files stored in the database of the management system To open the File Manager L Select Administration gt File Manager from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The File Manager window opens A In the View field use the drop down menu to select the type of file you want to manage The contents of the window will change according to the selected type The following sections describe the functionality of the following file managers according to the selected type M BTS File Manager on page 313 RW Offline Configuration File Manager on page 315 BTS File Manager The BTS File Manager enables viewing details of different files that were retrieved from managed devices and are available in the database of the management system It also enables initiating the Restore Configuration Task see Restore Configuration Task on page 295 exporting files to the client file system and importing files stored in the client file system Files are added to the database by either importing them see details below or by retrieving them from the managed devices using an applicable task Performance Collection or Backup Configuration Syste Managed iietwcr Ta Management Configuration Management Service Provisioning Admirustration Securty Management Help O Al Loenert eme x Fle Manager x ven BEZE ei Feer kel a 8
246. he current status of the Mini Centralized ASN GW The display is refreshed every 15 seconds 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page it maar DATA at Ze St Ha Dore L t Sech bk J Figure 3 4 Equipment View Page Mini Centralized ASN GW The Mini Centralized ASN GW view shows the Mini Centralized ASN GW device The color marking on the left side is according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the device Double click on the device s drawing to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 62 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Page 3 4 Site Page The Site page enables defining general site properties such as the site location date and time and ASN Topology settings as well as the use of input and output alarms time synchronization and clock source settings The Site page comprises the following tabs E Site General Tab M Site Dry Contact Tab applicable only for Macro Indoor BTSs 3 4 1 Site General Tab The General tab enables viewing editing the general site properties For BTS equipment it also enables viewing editing the ASN Topology W EMS after offe on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment a D an Site BERET Dry Contact Properties ASN Topaiogy BTS Number nm met BTS Name EMS dis g
247. he default is set by the Maximum Tx Power supported by the BTS The control range is 10dBm HW version Read only The hardware version of the Radio card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio HW revision Read only The hardware revision of the Radio card Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU HPA Card Read only Indicates whether the port is connected to an HPA card installed not installed HPA HW Version Read only The hardware version of the HPA Applicable only if an HPA card exists in an installed and associated Radio HCOS SW Version Read only The software version of the HCO8 controlling card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio CPLD SW Version Read only The software version of the CPLD controlling card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio Serial Number Read only The serial number of the Radio card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description ODU Status Read only A decimal number representing the value of a 32 bits mask indicating possible failures For details refer to Table 3 6 below Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio Tx Operational Status Read only The current operational status of the Tx port Table 3 6 ODU Status Mask Bit
248. hin the radio access network Radio Parameters Bandwidth The BS channel bandwidth 5 MHz 7 MHz 10MHz The default is 5 MHz A bandwidth of 7 MHz is not applicable for ODUs in the 2 x GHz band Center frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are M 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 M 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 M 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 M 3402 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 See also note below regarding dependency on configured Bandwidth Idle Mode Enable Use the check box to enable disable the idle mode feature Note The same idle mode status must be applied for the entire network The default is Disable Paging Group ID The Paging Group ID of the BS Applicable only if Idle Mode is enabled The range is from 0 to 65535 Must be set to a value other than 0 the default if Idle Mode is enabled Must be unique in the network different Paging Group ID for each BS INFORMATION The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that OD
249. ial configuration NIAI OD N A non trivial configuration N A non trivial configuration N A non trivial configuration First Zone Scheme is being determined by the selected Map Major Groups E For 7 10 MHz Full Loading means all Major Groups 0 5 are selected E For 5MHz Full Loading means that all relevant Major Groups 0 2 4 are selected For First Zone Maximum Size the values are E lf First Zone Minimum Size is set to No Limitations the value range for Maximum Size is the same as for Minimum Size H Else the value range is No Limitations or First Zone Minimum Size 2N up to a maximum of Y as defined below The value of Y that sets the upper limit for the Minimum and Maximum Size parameters depends on the Maximum Cell Radius and Total Uplink Duration parameters using the following formula Y A 3 Total Uplink Duration Extra TTG where A 46 for BW of 5 or 10 MHz and 32 for BW of 7 MHz 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Table 3 10 Calculating the Upper Limit Value Y for Minimum and Maximum Size Bandwidth Maximum Cell Total Uplink Extra TTG Upper Limit Y MHz Radius Km Duration slots symbols 5 10 1 2 4 8 4 0 34 0 28 1 2 4 8 15 23 5 1 30 7 1 24 15 23 30 4 2 32 6 2 26 30 5 3 28 7 3 22 7 1 2 4 8 15 23 4 0 20 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 33 1 22 5 1 16 30 4
250. ial network entries Number of failed initial networks entries Number of failed initial networks entries Number of authentication rejected cases Number of authentication rejected cases Number of rejections as a result of load balancing Number of rejections as a result of load balancing Management Service flows Counters Management Service flows counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs Management Service Flows counters provide information on the status of service flows The available Management Service flows counters are 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer ASN GW Counters Groups Counter Name Counts the Number of allocated Service flows Number of allocated service flows Total supported Service flows Total supported service flows 7 6 6 Load Balancing Counter Load Balancing counter is applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs Load Balancing counter provides status information on the total throughput supported by the ASN GW The available Load Balancing counter is Counter Name Counts the Throughput of last 15min Throughput of last 15 minutes interval 7 6 7 R6 Interface Total Counters R6 Interface Total counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs operat
251. ial networks entries Number of failed initial networks entries Number of authentication rejected Number of authentication rejected Number of deregistered CPEs Number of deregistered MSs Number of Incoming HO attempts Number of Incoming HO attempts Number of Outgoing HO attempts Number of outgoing HO attempts Number of registered MS s Number of registered MSs currently served by ASN GW 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 8 Tasks In This Chapter Performance Collection Task on page 288 not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Backup Configuration Task on page 292 Restore Configuration Task on page 295 Software Upgrade Task on page 298 File Data Aging Task on page 304 CLI Task on page 305 Mutual Neighboring Task on page 307 not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Configuration History Backup and Aging Task on page 311 Chapter 8 Tasks Performance Collection Task 8 1 Performance Collection Task The Performance Collection Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility The performance data collection and storage feature in the devices see also Performance Tab on page 51 enables collection and storage of selectable groups of counters at fixed intervals of 15 minutes The device stores the performance data files collected during the last 24 hours up to 96 xml files The Performance Collection task en
252. ic Statistic Counters RW R1 Interface Traffic Throughput Counters RW R1 Interface Traffic Quality Counters WR PG Interface Counters HM Management NE Report Counters 7 7 1 R1 Interface Traffic Statistic Counters R1 Interface Traffic Statistic counters are applicable for Macro and Micro BTSs except to some counters that are not applicable for Micro BTSs marked specifically in the description of relevant counters The available R1 Interface Traffic Statistic counters are Counter Name Counts the Number of Number of DL bursts transferred in MIMO A Number of DL bursts transferred in MIMO A Number of DL bursts transferred in MIMO B Number of DL bursts transferred in MIMO B Number of DL bursts transferred in CDD DDoB Number of DL bursts transferred in CDD DDoB Number of DL bursts transferred in BF Number of DL bursts transferred in BF Not applicable for Micro BTS Number of Total DL bursts transferred Number of Total DL bursts transferred Average RSSI channel 1 Average RSSI in dBm in channel 1 Average RSSI channel 2 Average RSSI in dBm in channel 2 Average RSSI channel 3 Average RSSI in dBm in channel 3 Average RSSI channel 4 Average RSSI in dBm in channel 4 i R1 Interface Traffic Throughput Counters R1 Interface Traffic Throughput counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs The available R1 Interface Traffic Throughput counters are Cou
253. ice Group Page Service Groups Tab Add Service Group 98 OOS Marking EN 108 Hot LININS E 110 SFA Page PHS Rules e nnne 114 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab s sssssssssnnnnunnnnnnnsnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 115 New Service ge OR e 119 Servic Protile PACS eebe eet 120 New BS WINGO am nee ere EE 126 CODY Existing BS Win ege ee een Ee ed 127 Radio Basic Page General Tab eutekgk geduet ageggeEaNSkEeh deeg ENEE SEENEN 130 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab 132 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab 134 Radio Basic Page Mobility TaD DE 140 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighbor EEN 144 Neighboring Task Runtime Results with Errors Operation Add Neighbor 145 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighbor EEN 145 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab ENNER 146 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab 147 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab 150 Radio Advanced Page QOS Tab 152 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab 153 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab 155 NeW Site Sector WINGOW EE 158 Site Sector lt gt Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BIS 159 Figure 3 57 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 178 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 196 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 ate Mode Figure 5 14 199 Figure 5 15 Figure
254. iceZone CellSiteld Sectorld Optional parameters for information purposes or for calculating BS ID LSB See details in BS ID Structure Section 6 3 3 The combination must be unique in the managed network 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File Parameter Name in File Description bsName BS Name The name of the BS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 printable characters Recommended to be unique across the managed network bsCellld Not applicable in Automatic Mode The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from O to 31 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsPreambleGroup Not applicable in Automatic Mode BS Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsFrameNumberOffset BS Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number In devices running SW version 2 5M the range is from 0 to 15 In devices running SW version 3 0 and higher the available options are O Zero and 1 Random If Random is selected the AU will choose a random number between 0 to 15 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsDIDataZonePermBase Not applicable in Automatic Mode Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The range
255. ie E Destrtated ASW ATS Location address Proda Type AxA Configsed Location inSteandRat hee e Gob ted Kate Contact Person echt Cents doed ASN GW Location Latitude i L v ao Lengtude vlas Arkude m ce 17 Seil e Ae ke Figure 3 5 Site Page General Tab BTS The General tab includes the following sections E Properties E ASN Topology not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW H Location not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 3 4 1 1 Properties The Properties section includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Page Parameter Description BTS Number The ID number of the device The BTS Number Site ID is used by the management system as identifier of the device and must be unique in the managed network The range is from 0 to 999999 The default value 0 is not a valid BTS Number it indicates that the BTS Number was not configured and a valid BTS Number must be configured A BTS with Site Number 0 will not be discovered by the management system Since the BTS Number is used by the management system to identify the device it is highly recommended not to modify it If necessary you must follow the BTS Number Change process described below BTS Name The name of the device An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters BTS Location The location of the device e g 21 Main
256. ied The Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 5 2 5 5 2 5 1 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects Customer VLAN ID The Customer VLAN ID value to be assigned to the classification rule The range is 1 4094 The default is 1 in the device the default is null Must be set to a valid value Service Profile Page The Service Profile page comprises the following tabs M Service Profile Config Tab E Service Flow Tab RW UL DL Reference Classification Rule Tabs Service Profile Config Tab Service Prolite Contig Service Flore UL Reterence Gest are Aude DL Reference Casstication Rude Mode Create GUpdate Debte KZG Revert d Name Pafe Status DI Figure 5 17 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Profile Config Tab Create Mode The Service Profile Config table includes the following parameters for ea
257. ient Tab E AAA Access Tab 5 2 1 1 AAA Client Tab RAR Clerk ana cess Mode Create Update Delete Fiters By clicking on a selected property name you can add it to this fiter Primary Server IP Address Om og of o Secondary Server IP address of of of o Radius Shared Secret Switch Over v O Redundancy x Sin Figure 5 3 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Client Tab The AAA Client parameters are 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual GC GC O d Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Primary Server IP Address The IPv4 address of the primary AAA server Cannot be the same as the Secondary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces The default is 0 0 0 0 which is not a valid address the default in the device is 172 16 0 1 Secondary Server IP The IPv4 address of the secondary AAA server Cannot be the same as Address the Primary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces 0 0 0 0 the default means no secondary server Must be set to a valid IP address if Redundancy is enabled RADIUS Shared Secret The shared secret between the authenticator function and the AAA server A string of 1 to 49 characters The default is an empty string which is not a valid string the default in the device is default Switch Over Enable to switch from the Primary Server to Secondary Server o
258. ify the PHS rule name if you want to perform PHS for this flow The default is null none Priority The priority level assigned to the classification rule The range is 0 255 The default is 0 Type The rule s type L2 or L3 The type of an existing rule cannot be modified The default is L3 Classification Rule Parameters Layer 2 applicable only for L2 rules 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Customer VLAN ID The Customer VLAN ID value to be assigned to the classification rule The range is 1 4094 The default is null The Customer VLAN ID of an existing rule cannot be modified Layer 3 applicable only for L3 rules Enable IP TOS Indicates whether the use of TOS based classification is enabled The default is Disable TOS Range Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP TOS is disabled The range of values From To of the IP TOS field from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 0 to 63 The default is From 0 To 0 TOS Mask Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled The mask for IP TOS value This bit mask is applied to the TOS field received in the IP header to be matched within the configured TOS range The range is from 0 to 63 The default is O Enable IP Protocol Indicates whether the packet is classified based on the
259. iguration and Offline Configuration Restore tasks the Target Equipment table includes only the read only details of the target equipment For a Site Configuration Restore task the target equipment is identical to the source equipment For an Offline Configuration Restore task the target device is according to the unique identification used when generating the file The details are available only if the State of the target site is Up For a Vendor Configuration Restore task click Add to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Target Equipment table Click Remove to remove one or several selected devices from the table 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 8 4 Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Software Upgrade Task In the Local CRAFT Utility the Software Upgrade Task is applicable only to the managed device 8 4 1 This section includes M The Software Upgrade Task Editor WH BTS Software Upgrade RW AU Software Upgrade applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The Software Upgrade Task Editor The Software Upgrade task enables loading a software file to selected devices and or managing the software files in the devices The Software Upgrade task enables loading a software file to selected devices and or managing the software files in the devices When working under Windows the files to be loaded should be available in the management system firmware folder filesystem firmware wm The
260. ile Empty lines are ignored Automatic Mode for Calculating BS Parameters In Automatic Mode applicable for devices running SW version 3 0 and higher some unique BS parameters can be calculated automatically by the management system based on the value configured for BS ID LSB These parameters are HM Cell ID bsCellld M Preamble Group bsPreambleGroup HM Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base bsDIDataZonePermBase E Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base bsUIDataPermBase 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Si Gi 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 4 1 Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File Paging Group ID bsPagingGroupld To use Automatic Mode do not configure any of these parameters in a worksheet used in Automatic Mode the relevant lines may be deleted In Manual mode all of these parameters must be configured If one or several but not all of these parameters is configured you will get an error message indicating that either none Automatic Mode or all Manual Mode of these parameters should be configured BS ID Structure BS ID structure is Operator ID BS ID LSB 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 11 bits 5 bits 8 bits 0 255 0 255 0 255 Service Zone Cell Site Sector ID 1 5 0 2047 Location ID 0 31 You can configure the optional Service Zone serviceZone Cell Site Location ID CellSiteld and Sector ID Sectorld parameters and use the following formula to calculate BS ID LSB
261. ill participate in the task and the current SW versions in each AU Click on the Add button to open the equipment selector allowing you to add AU s to the task You can select between AU Level Selection adding specific AUs or Site Level Selection adding all AUs in selected Sites Click on the Remove button to delete selected entries from the table 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei 8 5 Chapter 8 Tasks File Data Aging Task File Data Aging Task The File Data Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining Performance Collection files in the database see also The File Manager on page 312 By default the collected performance data is saved in the management system s file system In addition the performance data xml files can be exported and saved in the client management system s file system The task enables limiting the time that these files will be saved in both places if applicable to avoid allocation of too much disk space for old data This is a system task that cannot be deleted To open the File Data Aging Task Editor select the task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the entry File Data Aging days treshold e leie e El Eed D Figure 8 8 File Data Aging Task Editor The days threshold parameter sets the maximum time to maintain files in the database If the elapsed time since a file was added to the data
262. in the database of the management system BTS Number The BTS number Site ID as configured in the device BTS Name The name of the BTS as configured in the device NE Type The device type Site IP The IP address of the device SW Version The running SW version used by the device when the file was created File Name The name of the file The name includes the data and time at which the file was created by the source device using the real time clock of the device The format is E bkupCrtCfg file lt date amp time gt xml gz E bkupOlderCfg file lt date amp time gt xml gz E bkupLogging lt date amp time gt log gz E performance ptf_ lt date amp time gt xml gz Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility File Type The type of file E bkupCrtCfg A configuration backup file requested for current configuration E bkupOlderCfg A configuration backup file requested for an older configuration E bkupLogging A logging file E performance A performance collection file Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system using the real time clock of the client Status The status of the file Normal Orphan a backup file for a device that was removed from the database or a device for which the BTS Number was changed using the management system Imported for an imported file
263. ing Up to 30 characters An empty string null means that DHCP Option 60 is disabled The default is null Note that a null string option 60 disabled is not supported by the template manager Vendor Specific Information Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode Option 43 Name string Up to 64 characters The default is null the default in the device is InternetGatewayDevice ManagementServer URL Vendor Specific Information Value Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Server Proxy mode Option 43 Value string Up to 64 characters The default is null 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description External DHCP Server IP Address Applicable only for IP Service Groups using Relay mode The IP address of the external DHCP server The default is null a valid IP address must be specified the default in the device is 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode Enable Disable Relay Agent Information Option 82 The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Unicast Relay Agent Information Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information is enabled Indicates whether the Unicast parameter is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable RADIUS Attributes
264. ing Viewer The Performance Monitoring Viewer RW The Graph and Graph Controls Section on page 276 HM General Controls on page 277 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual O 272 Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Counters Group Selection Section 7 2 The Counters Group Selection Section The counters group selection section enables you to select a specific counters group The counters group selection section on the left side of the window displays all the counters groups applicable to the relevant device Use the Expand Collapse check boxes to view hide all counters groups available for each of the managed objects 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 7 3 Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Counters Selection Section The Counters Selection Section The counters selection section enables you to select specific counters for real time monitoring to define the color of the graph for each selected counter and to define the graph s values scale for each selected counter The counters selection section displays all the counters applicable to the counters group selected in the counters groups selection section Use the Expand Collapse check boxes to view hide all counters available in the group To the right of each counter the following details are available BR The color of the graph for this counter available only for a selected counter BR The current graph
265. ing in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs R6 Interface Total counters provide information on the total datapath traffic over R6 interface The available R6 Interface Total counters are Counter Name Counts the Number of R6 total Data path DL bytes counter R6 total data path DL bytes R6 total Data path DL unicast packets counter R6 total data path DL unicast packets R6 total Data path DL total packets counter R6 total data path DL packets R6 total Data path UL bytes counter R6 total data path UL bytes R6 total Data path UL unicast packets counter R6 total data path UL unicast packets R6 total Data path UL total packets counter R6 total data path UL packets 7 6 8 R3 Interface Counters R3 Interface counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs R3 Interface counters provide information on the traffic over R3 interface The available R3 Interface counters are 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer ASN GW Counters Groups Counter Name Counts the Number of R3 Data path DL bytes R3 total data path DL bytes counter R3 Data path DL unicast R3 total data path DL unicast packets packets counter R3 Data path DL total R3 total data path DL packets packets counter R3 Data path UL bytes R3 total data path UL bytes count
266. ing the action to be taken for a Shutdown or Reset Operation Option Description Shutdown The shutdown operation will shut down the entire site IMPORTANT The system cannot be re activated from remote To re activate the system turn off the power to the unit and then turn it on again Reset The site will be restarted All changes in parameters that require reset will take effect after restart Reset To Factory Default The system will be restarted with factory default configuration IMPORTANT All configurations will be deleted This also means loosing the ability to manage the unit from remote Local configuration of specific mandatory parameters using CLI is required to enable remote management of the site using the management system Refer to the Enabling Discovery on page 1 for details Reset To Factory Default With Connectivity The system will be restarted with factory default configuration except to parameters that are required to maintain management connectivity to the unit The parameters that are maintained without any change include RB Physical interfaces MGMT CSCD DATA configurations E P interfaces local management external management bearer configurations IP route configurations SNMP Managers configurations Trap Managers configurations AU software mapping not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Site ID No Action The default option no reset or shutdown opera
267. ion of BS ID LSB based on serviceZone cellSiteld and Sectorld For automatic calculation the entry for bsldLsb should include the relevant formula in the above example the formula for B10 should be B13 B12 256 B11 32 256 Alternatively you may configure it manually in which case serviceZone cellSiteld and Sectorld are ignored 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Se oO Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File 6 3 5 2 Example 2 Site 1 Configuration A B Site Site 2004 S siteld General Site siteName ite 2004 a Parameters siteAddress 4 Main Street External npulplifip External mgmt 192 168 200 4 Management Parameters On npulplfMask External mgmt 255 255 npulpRouteNextHop External mgmt 192 168 200 254 ExtMgmtVianid SD I 12 CellSiteld BSI 14 bsN e bs2004 1 sName S Parameters 15 bsFrameNumberOffset 16 bsFeedbackZonePermBase 17 bsBearerlp 192 168 199 10 18 bsOfdmaDownlinkCenterFreq j alalla 20 enee D Cellsitel Ss BS2 Sectois Cid Parameters 23lbsName SE 2 24 bsFrameNumberOffset_ l0 S 25 bsFeedbackZonePermBase _ J0 o O 28 End of BS definitions do not remove aeae Figure 6 2 Specific Parameters File Example 2 The above example is for Network Elements with the following properties M BTS running SW Version 3 0 or higher with two Bis M Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology M Connectivity Mode other than Unified
268. iority to be used for marking traffic that complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from O to 7 The default is O Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable The default is Disable the default in the device is Enable INFORMATION b The default QoS Marking Rules int_default and ext_default can be updated but cannot be deleted 5 2 4 SFA Page The SFA page comprises the following tabs SFA Config Tab PHS Rules Tab Classification Config Tab Classification Rule Protocol Tab Classification Rule Source Address Tab Classification Rule Destination Address Tab 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template HM Classification Rule Source Port Tab HM Classification Rule Destination Port Tab HM Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab 5 2 4 1 SFA Config Tab Mode A Cont LASi Sleneteation eege etn eebe Akkers Gassiat ee eegenen Delte Fiers By deg on a selected property name you cen add k to the fiert L Enable PHS Support D Figure 5 8 The ASN GW Template SFA Page SFA Config Tab The SFA Config tab include the following parameter Parameter Description Enable PHS Support Indicates whether or not PHS is enabled or disabled This setting applies to all PHS rules in the managed object The default is no disable 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual a
269. ipment Close no R External Equipment Close no 3 External Equipment Close no 4 External Equipment Close no 5 External Equipment Close no A P 6 External Equipment no Navigation SE S Pane Output Alarm Output Number Name T Sate i off 2 off b off Selected Page SQ lt i Control Buttons sien Yaw coe lt Status Progress Bar o Figure 3 1 The Device Manager Components Indoor BTS The Device Manager window comprises the following components 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager Component Description Title Bar Identifies the managed device s name It also includes standard icons for minimizing maximizing or closing the Device Manager Page Name The name of the current page Navigation Pane Displays all configuration information pages and enables opening a selected page by clicking on it Tab Selection Enables selection among tabs in pages with two or more tabs Selected Page The selected page Enables viewing managing the applicable parameters Status Bar Indicates the status of the current operation and displays a progress bar when applicable 3 1 3 Common Control Buttons The following buttons are common to most configuration information pages Button Description Z Help Opens the Help Navigator and Help Topic Window for the page mg Refres
270. is parameter is configured A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is public Enable Site Traps Indicates whether the sending of traps to the management station is enabled or disabled The default is Enable The SNMP Trap Managers section also includes the following buttons 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Se O Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Button Description Add Manager Adds a new entry to the SNMP Trap Managers table Delete Deletes one or several selected entries from the SNMP Trap Managers table INFORMATION For each SNMP Routing Table Trap Manager a route is automatically created in the IP Routing Table see IP Routing Tab on page 47 Following any change in the table Add Delete Modify the IP Routing Table is updated according to the change Note that this automatically created route is not displayed in the IP 3 5 2 6 Performance Tab The Performance tab allows enabling disabling collection and storage of performance data For details on collection and storage of counters supported counters groups and the counters in each group refer to the Performance Management document Management Management Interface Qos Marhng puer ACL IP Routing SNP Managers Performance Logang Performance Colection Interval i5 v Mn Performance Groups Activation Connectwity E Now Conne
271. ith currently existing or new defined vians ServicelfVlanld npuLciMgmtVlanid npulntMgmtVlanid nouExtMgmtVlaniqd A virtual parameter not included in configuration file that may affect automatic management by the management system of Backhaul VLAN Translation table as described in Section 6 3 4 8 below 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File 6 3 4 6 Service Interface Parameters Service Interface parameters should be repeated per Service Interface according to Type of the relevant Service Interface Service Interface parameters are applicable only for Network Elements operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology npuBootupMode asngwStatic 2 Parameter Name in File Description servicelfDescr An optional description of the Service Interface A string of up to 70 characters servicelffunDstlp Applicable only for IP in IP service interface The destination IPv4 address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface Tunnel Destination IP and Default Gateway IP and subnets of Local Management Internal Management and External Management servicelfVlanld Applicable only for VLAN QinQ and VPLS Trunk service interfaces The Service Interface V
272. ity Additional Extended ACLs are created automatically for every Service Group that is associated with a VLAN Service Interface and an enabled VLAN Service Up to 10 ACLs numbered ACL 187 to ACL 196 can be created These automatically created deleted ACLs allow Ping and DHCP traffic on the DHCP Own IP Address interface of the applicable VLAN service Table 3 3 Rules of Default VLAN Service Interfaces ACL 187 196 Rule Action Source IP Source Destination IP Destination Protocol Address Port Address Port Allow Any Any DHCP Own IP Address Any ICMP 1 defined for the applicable Service Group Allow Any Any DHCP Own IP Address 67 68 used UDP 17 defined for the for DHCP applicable Service traffic Group NOTE The default pre configured and automatically created ACLs cannot be deleted and should not be modified H Management Management Interface Gos Marking Rides ACL 1P Routing SNMP Managers Performance Logging AC Parameters Rule Number Rule Acton Ruk Parameters 7 r ee Sore P Akes oono Source IP Mask 265 255 055 255 Minimum Source Port Manure Source Port Destination PAddress 00 00 Deanin IP Mask 255 255 255 255 Minimum Destination Port S Maximum Destination Port e Protocol G L Pade action CZ Cassie 10 x E Re 1 Betrest e nn Dore Figure 3 12 Management Page ACL Tab The ACL tab includes
273. ity Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate Latency Updated range for R6 Profile parameters Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate Updated range for Map to R1 Profile parameters Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate Duplicate Site Manager New name was previously Offline August 2009 Configuration Manager 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Q Document History Topic Description Date Issued Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Modified structure August 2009 Creation wizard Step 2 p Updated range for Site Address Added IP Routing section Added comments on applicability of Connectivity parameters Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Added Service Interfaces section August 2009 Creation wizard Step 3 Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Updated names of some parameters August 2009 Creation wizard Step 4 STE H Removed Number Of Sub Channels UL Data Zone Added Paging Group ID Updated range for Center Frequency Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Removed Altitude Electrical Azimuth August 2009 Creation wizard Step 5 Adjustment Antenna Heading is not mandatory File Manager Updated to reflect all GUI changes of August 2009 Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 Added in Equipment File Manager SW Version Status In Duplicate Site File Manager Added NE updated descriptions of Site IP and Site ID T
274. k is disabled it indicates that the internal 1PPS at the NPU is used to synchronize air frames for inter site and intra site sectors When using a GPS External 1PPS clock must be enabled for proper operation of the system The default is Enable 3 6 2 3 3 Location Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Location parameters are configurable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS or Micro Outdoor BTS with GPS Type set to None Otherwise they are read only displaying the values calculated by the GPS receiver The Location section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Longitude The longitude of the site The format is IIl mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west The default is 000 000 E Latitude The latitude of the site The format is Il mmm a Il is latitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is N north or S south The default is 00 000 N Altitude The altitude in meters of the site The Altitude is in meters from 300 0 to 9000 0 The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D amp el 3 6 2 3 4 3 6 2 3 5 3 6 2 3 6 3 6 2 3 7 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Warm Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Parameter Description Almanac Usable Time The maximum period in hours for which
275. kte Piters By chching on a selected property name you can add R to the fitert O Zat of Ranging Codes x O Maamuma Cel Radius km v Figure 5 28 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Ranging Tab The Ranging parameters are Parameter Description Start of Ranging Codes The starting number of the group of codes used for the uplink The available options are 0 64 128 192 The default is O Maximum Cell Radius The maximum cell radius in km The available values are 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 The default is 1 the default in the device is 2 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual amp CG Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 2 2 Feedback Allocations Tab Ranong Teedbsck Sege Power Log Beem Forming Managemert L oe Mode Create Update ODekte Fitersi By ching on a selected property name you can s it to fe Det O IR COMA Aber d en Period Frames x 7 Refresh v swe Figure 5 29 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Feedback Allocations Tab The Feedback Allocations parameter is Parameter Description IR CDMA Allocation Period The period of IR CDMA allocations in frames The available options are 1 2 4 6 8 10 The default is 1 the default in the device is 2 In the current release actual value is always 2 the configured value is ignored 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Co
276. l Data Select an entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the ASN GW full details for the selected MS See below the displayed details The displayed full details for the selected MS include Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS MS Data MS ID MAC Address the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the serving device 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager Parameter Description Associated Service Flows per flow assigned to the MS SF ID The Service Flow ID Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow Direction The direction of the Service Flow Up or Down Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address The following buttons are now available in addition to the Refresh and Home buttons Button Description Retrieve All MSs Data Click to return to the previous screen displaying summary details for all MSs served by the selected device De Register MS Click to force de registration of the MS Retrieve Selected MS Full Select an
277. l MSs Data on page 166 Single MS De Registration on page 168 All MSs De Registration on page 169 Retrieval of MS Data The Retrieval of MS Data option is used to retrieve data related to a specific MS as maintained by the ASN GW that currently serves the MS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 4 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager Bl copnere moon x x Aroecove very settings x Biesen x L mmes x pl octets see x L eekrese x Network Maintenance Management ASN GW IP Address MS Outer NAT ai ron Apne Network Martensnce Server 10 10 107 117 User Jade Figure 4 1 Network Maintenance Retrieval of MS Data To retrieve data related to a specific MS enter the ASN GW IP Address of the ASN GW currently serving the MS Bearer IP address and the MS Outer NAI the complete NAI a string of up to 253 characters such as am 1 4efd450727234884ad6bf3db0d68c077 company com The settings of the MS identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server Click Apply to retrieve the data for the specified MS The displayed details include Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS MS Data Ms ID MAC
278. l Neighboring Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility 8 7 1 Introduction In a properly configured system neighboring definition between 2 Base Stations must always be mutual if BS1 is defined as a neighbor of BS2 then BS2 must be defined as a neighbor of BS1 The Mutual Neighboring Task enables checking consistency of neighboring BSs definition across the entire managed network reporting all non mutual neighbors and optionally fixing neighboring definitions It also enables updating all relevant neighbor parameters in all or selected BSs This is a system task that cannot be deleted To open the Mutual Neighboring task window select the task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the entry Mutual Neighboring Operation Data retrieval Report Al Fix All GQ Custom Database Device Filter bja a Ki Status Operation First BS ID Second BS ID First Location First Site First Ip Second Locat Second Site Second IP Report 10 20 30 2 6 35 Don t aul 192 168 19 Site 198 192 168 19 Report 10 20 30 2 6 25 Dont aul 192 168 19 Site 198 192 168 19 Report 5 6 2 0 131 0 192 168 19 ancaf 192 168 20 Report 10 20 30 1 1 1 Dont aul 192 168 19 Report 10 20 30 35 3 6 Dont aul 192 168 19 3 0 192 168 19 Report 35 3 7 2 22 15 3 0 192 168 19 Report 12 12 13 11 11 11 testservicib 192 168 20 Alpha 192 168 53 Report
279. ld IP address which now doesn t exist in the database of the management system After discovery the management system will initiate full synchronization as for any new device 6 The management system will add this new device to all network wide tasks such as keep alive 7 Regarding user initiated tasks such as Performance Collection and Backup Configuration the user should manually modify and add this device to the existing tasks 3 4 1 2 ASN Topology The ASN Topology section includes the Current and Configured options of the ASN Topology parameter RB Distributed ASN GW In this mode the NPU implements ASN GW functionalities that is it implements R3 Reference Point RP towards the CSN R4 reference point toward other ASN GWs and R6 reference point toward AU BSs The R8 reference point traffic is transparently relayed between AU BSs intra or inter shelf M Centralized ASN GW In this mode the NPU transparently relays R6 and R8 reference point traffic between AU BSs intra or inter shelf The ASN Topology parameter is not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW that operates always in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Micro Outdoor BTS that operated always in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology NOTE eo A change in ASN Topology will take effect after next reset 3 4 1 3 Location Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Location section in the Site page includes the following read only parameters
280. le Manager REENEN 315 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Figures Figures The Configuration History Request oo casiceccnscvnapeasesnsdhcnvincdsecntasannnne chainctanednasasaunsnsunoneseuceus 8 The Configuration History Report ss ssesssssessnsrsurnnssunnonnnnnrunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 9 The Device Manager Components Indoor BTS 12 Equipment View Page Macro Indoor BTS ae 17 Site View Page Macro Outdoor BTS with a 4 channels AU 19 Equipment View Page Mini Centralized AN GAN REENEN 21 Site Pace General TaD BIS cicssenicesiiestvectinidceninediacivetieeionsindeesdanieavalantnccuienteeeieeds 22 Site Page Dry Content attente 25 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Macro Indoor BTS 28 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Micro Outdoor BTS 32 Management Page Management Interface Tab Macro BTS 34 Management Page Management Interface Tab Micro BTS 37 Management Page QoS Marking Rules Tab REENEN ENEE 38 Management Page ACL ebessen e ee ERAN 43 Management Page IP ROUTING TaD ccccsececeseeeeecseeeeenenee
281. les Classification Rules PHS Rules G Enable PHS Support PHS Rule Number Name Field Value Mask Value bits Verify Value Size Value Bytes Done Figure 3 36 SFA Page PHS Rules Tab The PHS Rules tab includes the Enable PHS Support check box and the PHS Rules table Parameter Description Enable PHS Support Indicates whether or not PHS is enabled or disabled This setting applies to all PHS rules The default is Disable The PHS Rules table includes the following parameters Parameter Description PHS Rule Number The index number of the PHS rule An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 255 generated automatically during rule creation null Must be configured to a valid value Name The name of the PHS rule 1 30 characters The default is null Must be configured to a valid unique value Field Value The PHSF value that is the header string to be suppressed The default is Mask Value bits The PHSM that contains the bit mask of the PHSF with the bits set that is to be suppressed The default is null Must be configured to a valid value Verify Value Indicates whether or not the PHS header is to be verified The default is No 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Size Value Bytes The size o
282. letes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table An ACL with Active State UP cannot be deleted NOTE The priority of checking for a match in active ACLs is applied with respect to the sequence in which e these ACLs were attached to the relevant interface The first found match is applied To change the H priorities of ACLs you need to de attach them from the relevant interface s and then re attach them in the required order 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D O Q Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 3 5 2 3 2 ACL Parameters Section The ACL Parameters section includes the ACL Parameters table and the ACL Parameters Editor After you have created an ACL you can configure Allow Deny rules to be applied for traffic that meets certain criteria The ACL Parameters table displays the following read only parameters for each existing ACL rule Parameter Description Rule Number The ACL rule number An auto sequential number generated during creation of a new rule Rule Action The rule action Allow or Deny Allow indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUs Deny indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is dropped and not allowed to reach the ASN GW or AUs Select an entry to open the Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule A rule can be edited only when the Active State of the ACL is Deactivate
283. lient encapsulates the messages destined for the AAA server in RADIUS messages or decapsulates messages sent by the AAA server for the MS AAA AAA Client Generic Parameters ASN GW NAS ID NPU Radius Shared Secret GMT Time Zone Offset o s Source Ip Interface Bearer VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment MSB Shift Accounting UDP Port 1 813 SG Authentication UDP Port 1 812 AAA Client Parameters Current Server Primar Enable Redundancy Primary AAA Name default Secondary Server IP Address 66 3 3 3 Primary Server IP Address 10 10 128 249 Switch Over No Action Done Figure 3 31 AAA Page The AAA page comprises two sections the AAA Client Generic Parameters and the AAA Client parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual O ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The AAA Client Generic Parameters are Parameter Description ASN GW NAS ID The unique identifier of the ASN GW NAS Sent in Access Request message only if configured Should be in FQDN format Up to 64 characters The default is null GMT Time Zone Offset The time zone offset in seconds from GMT at the NAS The range is from 0 to 86400 seconds The default is 0 VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment Defines how to transfer VLAN ID between R3 and R6 E MSB Shift a When transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side
284. livery type Reference Service Group The Name of the Service Group to be used by the service flow Mandatory when creating a new Service Flow Must be the name of a Service Group that already exists in the target managed objects VPWS Service Groups are applicable only for VLAN CS Service Flows of the Default Service Profile Reference Service Interface The Name of the QinQ service interface Must be the name of a Service Interface that already exists in the target managed objects Applicable only for the Default Service Profile and Convergence Sublayer Type vlancs if the assigned Service Group is of type VPWS QinQ Uplink Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 40000 The default is O the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Uplink Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the uplink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is O the default in the device is 500 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Uplink Tolerated Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this uplink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 Th
285. lt screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Restore Task Editor for the selected task is displayed OR In the File Manager for BTS files select the required backup configuration file right click and select the Restore option or double click on the selected file The Restore Task Editor for a new task with the details of the selected file Type is Site Configuration is displayed OR In the File Manager for Offline Configuration files select the required file right click and select the Restore option or double click on the selected file The Restore Task Editor for a new task with the details of the selected file Type is Offline Configuration is displayed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D P95 Chapter 8 Tasks Restore Configuration Task Restore Configuration Task Name File Selection Type Site Configuration Name 200908222056 xml gz Creation Date wu Aug 27 13 02 32 IDT 2009 Source Equipment Region BTS Number BTS Name IP Address 10 10 144 35 Auto Reset oO Destination Equipment BTS Number NE Type IP Address Add 233 4M Macro BTS 10 110 144 35 Remove ae Kal cco Figure 8 5 Restore Task Editor The Restore Task editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date
286. maximum number of retries set by Number of Retransmissions has been reached The range is from 5000 to 10000 milliseconds 0 1 to 10 second The default is 5000 In addition the Keep Alive Status table not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS displays the current values of the Polling Period Number of Retransmissions and Retransmission Timeout for each of the relevant entities 3 5 5 ASN GW Pools Page The ASN GW Pools page is not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The ASN GW pools are part of the optional Load Balancing feature The Load Balancing feature provides a WiMAX operator with the capability to build resilient ASN infrastructure using ASN GW redundancy Every BS is provisioned with a list of redundant ASN GWs pool The BS applies round robin mechanism in order to pick an Authenticator for each MS that performs initial network entry This should eventually distribute the load between Anchor ASN GWs Geographical site backup can be achieved by using different priority of ASN GW pools At the unit NPU level up to two pools with different priorities each with up to 10 ASN GWs can be defined Each BS defined in the unit will inherit these pools It should be noted the ASN GW defined in the BS as the Default Authenticator see R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab on page 153 will be automatically included in the list of ASN GWs in the Primary Pool although it will not be shown as one of the ASN GWs in
287. me of Equipment File Manager September 2011 to BTS File Manager In BTS File Manager added the option for initiating the Mass Configuration Wizard Duplicate Site File Manager was changed to Offline Configuration File Manager with updated description 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Restore Task Updated to reflect removal of Duplicate Site Manager and changes associated with Offline Configuration files September 2011 Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab Updated applicable triggers for specific neighbor s November 2011 File Data Aging Task Updated description applicable for performance collection files November 2011 Configuration History Backup and Aging Task A new task November 2011 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Legal Rights Legal Rights Copyright 2011 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warrant
288. ment Page IP Routing Tab The IP Routing table includes the following parameters for each static route entry Parameter Description Destination The destination host or network IP address for the route Mask The net mask for the route Next Hop The next hop IP address for the route Must be in the same subnet with one of the NPU IP interfaces The IP Routing page also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the IP Routing table allowing you to configure a new IP Route parameters Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the IP Routing table 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity There are automatically created entries with the IP addresses of the directly connected Bearer External Management Local Management and Internal Management interfaces the IP address of the Internal Management interface is set to 10 0 0 254 This interface is not applicable for the Mini Centralized ASN GW The availability of certain interfaces depend on the connectivity mode For these entries the Mask is 255 255 255 0 and the Next Hop address is 0 0 0 0 any These entries cannot be modified or deleted by the user They will be updated automatically following any change in the relevant IP Source Address of the IP interface Routes will be created automati
289. menus the required ODU Type and the ODU Number to be assigned to it only unassigned numbers are available for selection For Indoor BTS ODU numbers range is 1 to 28 For an Outdoor BTS ODU number range is from 1 to 24 3 Click Apply to complete the new ODU creation The new ODU will be added to the list of ODU available in the ODU sub node To fully complete the creation of the ODU you should update the Ports Configuration if necessary and click Apply in the ODU page see ODU lt gt Page on page 72 gt To delete an ODU To delete an ODU right click the required ODU entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation NOTE see gs e GE e An associated ODU specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to H Site Sector lt gt Page on page 158 3 6 2 1 2 ODU lt gt Page The ODU node includes an ODU lt gt page for each created ODU The ODU lt gt page displays the properties of the respective ODU 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 3 6 2 1 2 1 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment ODU1 General Requred OCU Type Frequency Bard Maximum Tx Power Port Configuration Serial Number External Cavity Fiter Existence Ports Configuration Installed ze COU Type Me Frequency Band Bn Maspnan Tx Power d Port Configura
290. mgr ip source x x x x port 162 TraoCommunity public x x x x is the IP address of the EMS server b npu config trap mgr enable ip source x x x x Note that if the management system is behind a NAT router the NAT Outside IP address the IP of the router s interface connected in the direction of the managed device LAN must be defined in the device as a Trap Manager with traps sending enabled In the NAT router Port Forwarding NAT Traversal must be configured for UDP and TCP ports 161 and 162 from Outside IP connected to the managed device s LAN to Inside IP connected to the management system s LAN 8 Site ID Definition 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D ES Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery To define the site ID BTS Number npu config site identifier x x is the unique site identifier a number in the range from 1 to 999999 9 Save and Apply To save the configuration run the command npu write otherwise after the next time reset you will lose the configuration changes To apply the new configuration run the command npu reset Micro Outdoor BTS 1 Clear Previous Configuration Clear existing site configuration must be executed for used units In the Main menu of the Monitor program select BTS gt Unit Control gt Shutdown Operation gt updateParam and select the resettoFactoryDefault option 2 Configuring the Site Number In the Main menu of the Monitor program select BTS gt General gt upd
291. mited The more the abusing users instantaneous rate is below the threshold the more resource allocations limitation is applied Three levels of dynamic protection are available HM No protection BW Low protection level Protection against users with very poor channel conditions Should be used where the abusing users instantaneous rates are far below the average instantaneous rate within the sector HM Medium protection Protection against users with relatively poor or very poor channel conditions Should be used where the abusing users instantaneous rates are below or far below the average instantaneous rate within sector A dynamic protection mechanism is implemented in which the mechanism of limiting resource allocations is automatically and dynamically activated when needed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Advanced 0 0 2 55 55 55 Feedback Power Control Management QoS Scheduler Scheduler Mode Scheduler OL Abuse Protection Level Scheduler Ut Abuse Protection Level ET Dore Fal Rate Iv None Iv None Iv 7 Betresn Avr A Figure 3 52 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Scheduler Mode The basis for allocating excess bandwidth among relevant users E Equal Rate Throughput Fairness E Equal Time Resource Fairness The selec
292. n Service VLAN ID Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VLAN QinQ and VPLS Trunk service interfaces Mandary for Create Mode of a VLAN QinQ or VPLS Trunk service interface The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter for VLAN service interface SVID for QinQ service interface The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 A Service Interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of a VPWS Mapped Service Group The default is O if selected must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface Default Gateway IP Address Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Mandary for Create Mode of a VLAN service interface The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IPs Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address and subnets of Default Gateway IP addresses Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface The default is 0 0 0
293. n IP service interface Configurable only when adding a new service interface The destination IPv4 address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface Tunnel Destination IP and Default Gateway IP and subnets of Local Management Internal Management and External Management The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Service VLAN ID Applicable only for VLAN QinQ and VPLS Trunk service interfaces Configurable only when adding a new service interface The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter for VLAN service interface SVID for QinQ service interface The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 The default is 0 Must be set to a valid value other than the default 0 The VLAN ID of an existing Service Interface cannot be changed A Service Interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of a VPWS Mapped Service Group Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Configurable
294. n Minimum Size In the current release the value of this parameter is ignored First Zone size is defined only by Minimum Size parameter Maximum Map Size Limits the maximum size of maps in slots The available options are 10 20 300 10xN where N 1 30 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gd Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description Neighbor Beam Forming Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor units operating in MIMO Matrix A B mode The beam forming mechanism is based on symmetry in performance between uplink and down link To compensate for possible differences due to HW of the ODU a special low level calibration signal is transmitted periodically in each link During the time this calibration signal is transmitted all other radio links of the same BS and all its neighbors should not transmit to reduce potential interference The Beam Forming mechanism ensures that all neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode will enter into silent mode when necessary However since this results in slightly reduced throughput units operating in Matrix A B mode should enter into silent mode when necessary based on frame number information only if it has neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode The Neighbor Beam Forming parameter Indicates whether any of the neighboring BSs operates in Beam Forming mode The default i
295. n dB Neighbor CINR gt Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbor 64 to 63 5 in BS is above the Trigger steps of 0 5 threshold in dB Neighbor CINR Own CINR gt Handover Request The CNR at the Neighbor 64 to 63 5 in BS minus the CINR at the steps of 0 5 Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI lt Scan Request The RSSI at the Serving BS 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 Neighbor RSSI gt Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbor BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 Neighbor RSSI Own RSSI gt Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbor BS minus the RSSI at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm 32 to 31 75 in steps of 0 25 Distance Scan Request Handover Request The Serving BS distance from the MS calculated by measuring the round trip delay is above the Trigger threshold in meter 0 3400 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 10 MHz 0 6800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 5 MHz 0 4800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 7 MHz Note Following any change in Bandwidth the existing Distance triggers must be deleted and redefined 3 8 2 1 4 3 Neighbor List The Neighbor List includes the following parameters for each Neighbor BS Parameter Description BS Neighbor ID Read only The BS ID LSB of the Neighbor BS IP Address The IP address of the neighbor BS 4Motion and MC ASN GW
296. nagement system use the Restore configuration task see Restore Configuration Task on page 295 to load the suitable Offline Configuration file to the site 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gei Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer In This Chapter The Performance Monitoring Viewer on page 271 The Counters Group Selection Section on page 273 The Counters Selection Section on page 274 The Graph and Graph Controls Section on page 276 General Controls on page 277 ASN GW Counters Groups on page 278 BS Counters Groups on page 284 Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Performance Monitoring Viewer wal The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Performance Monitoring Viewer enables on line monitoring of graphs for selected counters The graph for an accumulating counter displays the average rate per second during the interval from last polling time defined as Current Value Previous Value Polling Interval For gauge counters marked with a sign before the counter s name the absolute value reported at the polling time is displayed _ To open the Performance Monitoring Viewer In the Equipment Manager select one device whose state is Enabled right click on the entry and select the Performance option in the pop up window The Performance Monitoring Viewer for the selected device will open The Performance viewer include three sections the co
297. nectivity Button Description Add Manager Adds a new entry to the SNMP Managers table Delete Deletes one or several selected entries from the SNMP Managers table INFORMATION The Read and Write Communities are mandatory and both must be defined other than null er Duplication of Communities pairs is not allowed each pair must be unique NOTE H If you delete all SNMP Managers you will loose the ability to manage the site using SNMP 3 5 2 5 2 SNMP Trap Managers A maximum of five SNMP Trap Managers can be configured If the maximum number is reached the Add Manager button becomes inactive NOTE e For proper management of the site such as getting notifications on configuration change events the I network management server must be defined as a Trap Manager The SNMP Trap Managers tab e includes the following fields for each authorized SNMP Trap Manager Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the Trap Manager Must be unique in the network the same IP address cannot be assigned to more than one Trap Manager The default is 192 168 0 1 Port Number The port number on which the Trap Manager will listen for messages from the Agent The range is from 1 to 65535 The port on which the management system listens for traps is 162 Community The name of the SNMP Read Community used by the Trap Manager Traps are sent toward those Managers for which th
298. nfiguring Templates BS Template 5 3 2 3 Power Control Tab Cana feedback Alocators Poner cornil Beam Former Management G05 Mode Crese Update Delete Per By ching on a selected property name you can add bo this Dei O Target cen LJ Ack 8 co D von S aeons LJ PK 1 2 d8 o O yxa E On iid LI 16 QAM ah teen a CU oam 0 s O gmana td bk LJ 64 QAM 3 4 ten KR D oam ip n O Akmed iterference Level DI ae eee Figure 5 30 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control parameters are Parameter Description Target NI The target noise and interference level for the PUSC zone in dBm The range is from 130 to 110 in steps of 1 dBm The default is 130 the default in the device is 127 ACK The C N in dB required for sending ACK reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB The default is O the default in the device is 712 CO The C N in dB required for sending CQI reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for ACK 8 to Required C N Level for ACK 7 see ACK parameter above The default is O the default in the device is 12 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description CDMA The C N in dB r
299. ng to file Indicates whether or not logging to file is enabled The default is Enable checked INFORMATION A route for the Log File Server is automatically created in the IP Routing Table see IP Routing Tab on page 47 Following any change in the Log File Server Enable Disable Modify Server IP the IP Routing Table is updated according to the change Note that this automatically created route is not displayed in the IP Routing Table In addition in the Logging Severity section you can disable logging to file or set the minimum severity level that generates a log entry for each of the following types of events 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D e Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description SW Version Software upgrade procedures Fault Fault management procedures Performance Performance management procedures Shelf Shelf management procedures Startup System startup procedures Connectivity Connectivity procedures ASN GW ASN GW procedures applicable only in Distributed ASN GW mode Internal AU Manager Internal processes used for managing the AUs not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The available minimum severity options are Disable no logging Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational The default for all event types is Error 3 5 3 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page The ASN GW B
300. ning specific configuration details for a single new site To simultaneously create multiple offline configuration files for two or more new sites a suitable license is required 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Ge Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Golden Site Configuration Backup File 6 2 Golden Site Configuration Backup File For each site type a golden site to be used as the basis template for creating configuration files for other sites should be created Site type is defined by the main properties that will be shared by all sites created using it as a basis such as ASN Topology Connectivity Mode number and configuration of sectors number and types of Service Interfaces and number and types of Service Groups Golden site configuration should be valid and optimal since it will be copied to multiple sites A backup file of the golden site should be prepared The XML backup file will be used as an input for the Mass Configuration Wizard 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File Excel File Excel Worksheet Structure An Excel file that includes specific configuration details for each of the new sites should be pre prepared For each site the file contains M General site parameters H External Management parameter Not applicable for devices BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology if
301. not Associated to sector Frequency Band The frequency band supported by the installed ODU Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power The maximum Tx power available for the installed ODU Type in dBm Port Configuration The Port Configuration of the installed ODU Type 1x1 2x2 or 4x2 In addition the following ODU general properties are displayed below the Required and Installed sections Parameter Description Serial Number Read only The serial number of the ODU enclosure External Cavity Filter Existence Check to indicate the existence of an external cavity filter The default is no unchecked Ports The Ports section includes parameters for each of the ports supported by the ODU The Ports table includes the following parameters for each ODU port Parameter Description Tx Power dBm The required Tx power at the specified ODU Port in dBm Applicable only for Tx Rx ports Port 1 in a 1x1 ODU Ports 1 and 2 ina 2x2 ODU Ports 1 and 3 in a 4x2 ODU The actually available range depends on ODU Type The upper limit which is the default is set by the Maximum Tx Power supported by the ODU The control range is 10dBm HW version Read only The hardware version of the ODU card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU HW revision Read only The hardware revision of the ODU card connected to this port Applicable only for
302. nter Name Description R1 Data path DL bytes counter R1 data path DL traffic of all service types in bytes R1 Data path UL bytes counter R1 data path UL traffic of all service types in bytes 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Gd Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer BS Counters Groups Counter Name Description UGS Data path DL bytes counter UGS data path DL traffic over all MCSs in bytes UGS Data path DL bytes counter UGS data path UL traffic over all MCSs in bytes eRT Data path DL bytes counter ERT data path DL traffic over all MCSs in bytes eRT Data path UL bytes counter ERT data path UL traffic over all MCSs in bytes RT Data path DL bytes counter RT data path DL traffic over all MCSs in bytes RT Data path UL bytes counter RT data path UL traffic over all MCSs in bytes nRT Data path DL bytes counter NRT data path DL traffic over all MCSs in bytes nRT Data path UL bytes counter NRT data path UL traffic over all MCSs in bytes BE Data path DL bytes counter BE data path traffic over all MCSs in bytes BE Data path UL bytes counter BE data path traffic over all MCSs in bytes 7 7 3 R1 Interface Traffic Quality Counters R1 Interface Traffic Quality counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs The available R1 Interface Traffic Quality counters are Counter Name Description DL HARQ Repetitions
303. o 128 characters NE Type Enables selection of the type of target Network Elements that will participate in the task CLI Protocol Protocol Enables selection of the protocol to be used Telnet or SSH The default is Telnet Port Displays the default port to be used For Telnet the default is 23 For SSH the default is 22 User The user name for the CLI script Must be a user that is defined in the target device s The default user is admin Password The password for the CLI script Must be the password associated with the defined user in the target device s The default password is admin123 The Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Name The name of the site as configured in the device IP Address The IP address of the device Location The Location associated with the device in the management system Click Add to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Equipment table Click Remove to remove one or several selected devices from the table In the CLI Script text box enter the CLI script to be executed on the target device s You can use the Browse button to import a pre prepared script that may be edited after being imported to the task 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D God Chapter 8 Tasks Mutual Neighboring Task 8 7 Mutual Neighboring Task The Mutua
304. o 20 Mbps Enhanced up to 25 Mbps Trial up to 30 Mbps Maximum throughput for two MSs may be increased to up to 16Mbps per MS when set to Standard Enhanced or Trial The default is Basic Legacy ASN GW Mode Defines functionality supported by ASN GW Select Enable if using a Cisco ASN GW does not support Ethernet CS services Select Disable if using any other approved ASN GW The default is Enable The default in the device is Disable 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D G Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 1 2 RF Tab General Def Ter Base Band L Air Frame Structure Triggers Mode Create Update Delete Fiters By clicking on a selected property name you can add it to this fiter G Center frequency MHz Figure 5 24 The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab The RF parameter is Parameter Description Center frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are M 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 M 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid value
305. ocal configuration of specific mandatory parameters using CLI is required to enable remote management of the site using the management system Refer to the Enabling Discovery on page 1 for details Reset To Factory Default With Connectivity The system will be restarted with factory default configuration except to parameters that are required to maintain management connectivity to the unit The parameters that are maintained without any change include E Physical interfaces MGMT CSCD DATA configurations E P interfaces local management external management bearer configurations IP route configurations SNMP Managers configurations Trap Managers configurations AU software mapping not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW and Micro BTS E Site ID No Action No reset or shutdown operation The default is Shutdown which means disabling remote control of the unit The default in the device is No Action 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Equipment Template 5 5 2 AU Control Tab Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS NPU System Management AU Corkral Statuen Pover MU to COU Mode Opie t Fiters By diding on a selected property name yeu can add it to this fiter Add X pe Rewert d A Set Mumbar ols NM Au kt Number a O Sirti Operation 7 Refresh vi save EH Figure 5 45 The Equipment Template Shelf Page AU C
306. ocation configuration is not required This type of service group is not associated with any R3 service interface as vilan tagged MS traffic is transferred transparently on the on the R3 interface A VPWS Transparent service group can be configured to support time based accounting VPWS QinQ This type of service group is used only for VLAN CS flows Once service group is configured as type VPWS QinQ type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group is not associated with any R3 service interface as double tagged MS traffic is transferred transparently on the on the R3 interface The QinQ VLAN used by the MS should be received from the AAA server in Access Accept messages A VPWS QinQ service group can be configured to support time based accounting VPWS Mapped This type of service group is intended for special needs were VLAN CS service flows from multiple MSs use the same VLAN ID Once service group is configured as VPWS Mapped type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group makes the mapping between a unique MS flow VLAN ID used on R3 interface and a CVID The CVID can be missing For this service group type a VLAN pool need to configured The ASN GW will uniquely allocate a VLAN from the Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW configured pool to each MS flow to be used on R3 interface A VPWS Mapped service group can be configured to support time based accounting BR VPLS Hub
307. od Enable polling upon zero bandwidth request all Timing Corrections parameters Maximum CQI Region Size Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab New Moved from Radio Basic Page with August 2009 following changes Downlink Data MIMO Mode is read only Removed all other parameters excluding Downlink Permutation Base and Uplink Permutation Base 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Cl Document History Topic Description Date Issued Radio Advanced Page Channel Removed August 2009 Descriptors Tab Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab name changed was Power Control Levels August 2009 Tab Added Power Control Correction Factor Removed Feedback Zone and Maximum EIRxP Updated range for PUSC Zone Radio Advanced Page Power Control Removed August 2009 Policy Tab Radio Advanced Page Rate Removed Basic Rate parameters moved to August 2009 Adaptation Tab Services Page Definitions Tab Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab New Name was Handover August 2009 Removed all SBS and Handover Control parameters Changed the name of RSSI parameter in Trigger Setup parameters to Averaging Duration with updated description removed all other Trigger Setup parameters Changed Neighbor Advertisement to Neighbor Advertisement Broadcast Changed the name of Periodic Interval to Interval Removed all other Neighbor Advertisement parameters Radio Advanced Page Scanning Ta
308. oes not match any DL filter rule shall be dropped DHCP traffic in UL and DL direction is always passed Anti spoofing function filtering of UL traffic is performed before the Hot Lining filtering Hot Lining is not applied on an MS with VLAN or Ethernet Services If the ASN GW receives Access Accept message which includes any Hot Lining attributes and the subject MS is granted at least one flow with CS type of VLAN or Ethernet the ASN GW shall initiate De registration of the MS MSs with tunneled traffic are not supported by Hot Lining When Hot Lining is disabled in ASN GW it shall not include Hot Lining Capabilities attributes in any Access Request messages If AAA replies with Access Accept message which includes any Hot Lining attributes ASN GW shall initiate De registration of the MS Hot Lining Hot Uning Profiles And Rides RW Enable Hot Liring Profies Profle N Profle NW Http Red Cake i oad Deable g 1 Disable Pier Rules Profile Number Profle Nome Http Bechet URL LJ Enable Profiie RuleNurber Be Mag Drei lpAddess Set Mask Ip Protocdl Source Port Start Source Port Stop Destination Po Destination Po DCH Start H i u 255 255 255 255 295 295 295 295 255 3 65535 H 65535 e EI ZE A e ci Retreats vi An I Dore cc Figure 3 35 Hot Lining Page 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 7 4 1 3 7 4 2 3 7 4 3 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN
309. onal description of the type of media carried by the service flow A string of up to 15 characters The default is null Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate bps The maximum sustained traffic rate in bps for downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts Not applicable for service flows with UGS uplink data delivery type The range is 0 5 000 000 bps The default is O The default in the device is 100 000 bps Delivery Type The data delivery type for downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts The options are UGS RT VR NRT VR BE ERT VR ANY The default is UGS The default in the device is BE Minimum Reserved Rate bps the minimum rate in bps reserved for for downlink traffic carried by the service flow used for multicasts Aapplicable only for service flows with the appropriate data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR The range is 0 5 000 000 bps The default is O The default in the device is 100 000 bps For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate Maximum Jitter msec The maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for the downlink service flow used for multicasts Applicable only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR The range is 0 4 294 967 295 msec The default is O VPLS Local Switch Applicable only for VPLS Hub And Spoke Service Groups If set
310. onfigurable only when creating a new Service Group Type The Service Groups type IP VPWS QinQ VPWS Transparent VPWS Mapped VPLS Hub and Spoke Configurable only when creating a new Service Group The default is IP 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Service Interface Name Applicable only for IP and VPLS Service Groups The pre defined service interface alias used as the data path for traffic towards the core network Configurable only when creating a new Service Group Note that a Service Interface can be associated only to a single Service Group Only a VPLS Trunk service interface can be associated with a VPLS service Group A VPLS Trunk Service Interface cannot be associated with any other Service Group type The drop down list includes only valid selections according to type of service interfaces that are not associated with any service group and is sorted by creation time The default is the oldest valid service interface in the database DHCP Function Mode Applicable only for IP Service Groups The DHCP function mode E Server The ASN GW function as a DHCP server that allocates an IP address to the MS from the local pool in the non HA mode E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns t
311. only when adding a new service interface The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address and subnets of Default Gateway IP addresses Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value Subnet Mask Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The subnet mask of the default gateway Should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces The Subnet Mask of a service interface associated to a service group cannot be modified The default is 255 255 255 0 Encapsulation Type Applicable only for VPLS Trunk service interfaces The encapsulation mode of applicable traffic VLAN or Stacked VLAN QinQ The default is VLAN 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 95 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Outer VLAN ID Applicable only for VPLS Trunk service interfaces if EncapsualationType is set to Stacked VLAN The Service Interface Outer VLAN ID For details refer to Table 3 7 below A Service Interface Outer VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Inte
312. ontrol Tab Macro BTS The AU Control table for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry AU Slot Number The AU Slot Number The AU Control Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description AU Slot Number The slot number of the AU 1 4 7 9 slot number 4 is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS The default is O which is not a valid slot number Shutdown Operation The type of operation to be performed Normal Operation no action Shutdown disable power to card or Reset The default is Normal Operation 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gi Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Equipment Template 5 5 3 AU Control Tab Micro Outdoor BTS Mode rente Update Fiters By clicking on a selected property name you can add amp to this fiter 2 Shutdown Operation x x Rofrash vi Save AAA Figure 5 46 The Equipment Template Shelf Page AU Control Tab Micro BTS The AU Control tab for Micro Outdoor BTS includes the Shutdown Operation parameter with the following options Option Description Shutdown The shutdown operation will shut down the entire site IMPORTANT The system cannot be re activated from remote To re activate the system turn off the power to the unit and then turn it on again
313. oor Macro BTS AUs to Slot AU Slot AU of NAU 7 SAU 1 Master AU of DAU 1 left side of DAU 1 Slave AU of DAU 1 right side of DAU 1 Master AU of DAU 2 left side of DAU 2 oO O N LA Slave AU of DAU 2 right side of DAU 2 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment AU Mandatory Parameters Type AU 4x4 Modem AU Number AU slat 9 ES Figure 3 22 New AU Window 2 Configure the mandatory properties of the required AU in the New AU window Parameter Description Type The required AU type In a Macro Indoor BTS only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable In a Macro Outdoor BTS the applicable options are AU 4x4 Modem for a 4 channels AU and AU 2x2 Modem for a 2 channels AU The default is AU 4x4 Modem AU Number Select the required slot number The available options include all currently empty slots AU entity does not exist The default is the first available empty slot The AU Number is read only if the New AU window was opened by double clicking on an empty module in the Equipment View page 3 Click Apply to complete the new AU creation The new AU will be added to the list of AU Slot available in the AU sub node gt To delete an AU To delete an AU right click the required AU Slot entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the
314. op Responses Accounting Retransmissions Accounting Retransmissions Accounting Rejects Accounting Rejects Accounting Packets of Unknown types Accounting Packets of Unknown types Accounting Malform Access Responses Accounting Malform Access Responses Accounting Timeouts Accounting Timeouts 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer ASN GW Counters Groups Counter Name Counts the Number of Accounting Round Trip Delay Accounting Round Trip Delay Calculation formula Sum all timing between all Accounting Start Requests and Accounting Stop response and Sum of all time between all Accounting Stop Requests and Accounting Stop Responses during 15min Sum of Events not responded events will be discarded from this counter result 7 6 2 Bearer Interface Counter Bearer Interface counter is applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs Bearer Interface counter provides status information on the number of active MSs served by the ASN GW The available Bearer Interface counter is Counter Name Counts the Number of Number of Active MS Number of active MSs currently served by ASNGW 7 6 3 Management Provisioned QoS Counters Management Provisioned QoS counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and
315. operation 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D er Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment NOTE DEE PIA i e An associated AU specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to j Site Sector lt gt Page on page 158 3 6 1 3 2 AU lt Type and Slot gt Page The AU node includes an AU lt Type and Slot gt page for each created AU In a Micro Outdoor BTS there is always a single object Micro ODU Slot 1 representing the entire BTS For details on creation deletion of AU entities refer to Creating Deleting an AU on page 65 The AU lt Type and Slot gt page includes the following tabs RW AU Card Properties Tab RW AU Control Tab 3 6 1 3 2 1 AU Card Properties Tab The Card Properties tab displays configuration and status information for the AU module AU 4 Channels Slot 2 Card Properbes Control Requred Installed Type A 4x4 Mode Type Serial Number HW Version Number HW Revision Number Book SW Version Number TF Version Number Operational SW Version Number EECH Shadow Sw Version Number Currerkt Running SW Source Maintenance Connecthaity 1P Address 192 160 0 1 Mask 295 255 255 0 Next Hop 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID 3 elei ci Bee we apy Dore Figure 3 23 AU lt Type and Slot gt Page Card Properties Tab Macro BTS The AU Card Properties tab includes the following sections M Required and Installed M General Properties
316. or uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 The default is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 Not applicable for UGS data delivery type The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kbps for uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 40000 The default is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVR RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the uplink downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 500 If data delivery type is ERTVR or UGS the default value should be 90 ms Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Tolerated Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this uplink downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 0 Relevant only for service flows with the a
317. ot equals 3 symbols To avoid BS BS interference the ul dl allocation must be identical in all BSs in a geographical region The range is 4 7 for bandwidth of 5 or 10MHz 3 5 for bandwidth of 7MuHz The default is 3 in the device the default is 6 After each change in the Bandwidth parameter the value must be configured to a proper value Map The allocated to the BS for maps transmission as indicated by a 6 bits bits O 5 string If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant Bits 0 2 4 must be set to 1 Configure 101010 If BW 7 10 MHz with reuse 1 all bits 0 to 5 must be set to 1 Configure 111111 For BW 7 10 MHz with Reuse 3 E if Segment Number is 0 then bits 0 and 1 should be set to 1 Configure 110000 E if Segment Number is 1 then bits 2 and 3 should be set to 1 Configure 001100 E if Segment Number is 2 then bits 4 and 5 should be set to 1 Configure 001111 The default is null in the device the default is 000000 all bits not set Basic Map Repetition The basic repetition used in the transmission of the maps using QPSK 1 2 The available options are 1 2 4 and 6 1 means no repetitions The default is 1 in the device the default is 6 Downlink Data MIMO Mode The downlink diversity mode used by the system Matrix A B or Beam Forming The Beam Forming option is not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS The default is Matrix A B D
318. ounting Interim messages on a preconfigured or negotiated interval AAA server can send negotiated time interval in Access Accept message If the defined value see Interim Interval below is zero and there is no Acct Interim Interval in Access Accept interim updates should be deactivated E Volume and time based Applicable only for IP Service Groups Functionality is the same as for Time option above In addition this mode supports postpaid accounting by supporting IP Session Volume Based Accounting The ASN GW will report the cumulative volume counters for each MS IP Session The counters will be collected per MS Service Flow and will be cumulated in order to get the MS IP Session counters The default is Time based Interim Interval Min Not applicable if Accounting Mode see above is set to None The default interval in seconds for Accounting Interim reports to be used if Acct Interim Interval is not received from the AAA server Value 0 means interim reports are deactivated unless Acct Interim Interval is sent by the AAA server in Access Accept messages The valid range is O none or 5 1600 minutes The default is O the default in the device is 5 Vid Map Start and Vid Map End Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The start and end value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping End value cannot be lower than Start value The range for both is from 1 to 4094 The default for Vid Map Start is
319. ownlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from O to 31 The default is 0 Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The valid range is from O to 69 The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ei D G Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The valid range is from O to 69 The default is 0 Minimum Size The initial size in symbols of the first zone When reuse 3 is used within first zone this parameter should be equal across all BSs within deployment The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation For more details refer to First Zone Minimum Size Recommended Value Range on page 139 In the current release this is the actual size of the first zone For reuse 1 the default no limitation can be used the actual size will be set dynamically according to the configuration For reuse 3 a specific value must be configured Maximum Size Maximum size in symbols for first zone Used mainly for performance control capability within frame The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation Maximum Size cannot be lower tha
320. pMsSubnet 255 2552550 d D Figure 6 3 Specific Parameters File Example 3 The above example is for Network Elements with the following properties E Mini Centralized ASN GW E Unified Connectivity Mode M Three Service Interfaces Type of first Service Interface is IP Type of second Service Interface is QinQ Type of third Service Interface is VLAN M Three Service Groups DHCP Function Mode of first Service Group is Server with two excluded IP addresses DHCP Function Mode of second Service Group is Relay DHCP Function Mode of third Service Group is Proxy 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 6 4 6 4 1 Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Using the Mass Configuration Wizard Using the Mass Configuration Wizard The Mass Configuration Wizard includes the following sections HM Mass Configuration Wizard Common Parameters H Mass Configuration Wizard Import Unique Parameters File H Mass Configuration Wizard Merge File HM Mass Configuration Wizard Summary Starting the Mass Configuration Wizard To start the Mass Configuration Wizard In the File Manager select the backup configuration file to be used as the golden file right click and select the Mass Configuration option to open the Mass Configuration Wizard displaying the name of the selected backup file INFORMATION The golden file should be a backup file of one of the following E SW Versions 2
321. parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable The default is Disable the default in the device is Enable Service Flow Data Delivery The Service Flow Type for data delivery services uGS BE eRTVR or ANY Type The default is uGS the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority The priority of Service Flow traffic 0 7 or ANY The default is O the default in the device is ANY 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 5 3 4 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Parameter Description Service Flow Media Flow The Service Flow Media Flow Type as defined in ASN GW or AAA server Type Enable Service Flow Media Indicates whether the condition for Service Flow Media Flow Type is Flow Type enabled or disabled If enabled the Service Flow Media Flow Type will be considered when looking for a match The default is true the default in the device is false Outer DSCP Marking The DSCP value to be used for marking the outer IP header IP GRE The range is 0
322. plicable only if Type is L3 and Enable IP TOS is enabled The range of Range To values From To of the IP TOS field from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from O to 63 The default is From O To 0 TOS Mask Applicable only if Type is L3 and Enable IP TOS is enabled The mask for IP TOS value This bit mask is applied to the TOS field received in the IP header to be matched within the configured TOS range The range is from 0 to 63 The default is 0 Enable IP TOS Applicable only if Type is L3 Indicates whether the use of TOS based classification is enabled The default is no disable PHS Rule Name Applicable only if Type is L3 The Packet Header Suppression PHS rule name associated with the classification rule Specify the PHS Rule Name if you want to perform PHS for this flow Must be a PHS Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects The default is null none which is not a valid value Type Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The rule s type L2 or L3 The default is L2 the default in the device is L3 A Classification Rule includes additional parameters that can be managed using the other tabs of the SFA page 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template 5 2 4 4 Classification Rule Protocol Tab EE SEA Config L PHS Rules Glssefication Config Cssbesger Ride Protocol
323. ppropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS ERTVR Unsolicited Grant Interval The nominal interval in ms between successive data grant opportunities ms for this uplink service flow The range is 0 65535 The default is 20 Must be lower than Uplink Max Latency Relevant only for uplink service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 3 7 5 3 2 4 Reference Classification Rule Section The Reference Classification Rule section enables managing rules for the classification of uplink and downlink traffic The Reference Classification Rule section includes two tables one listing the UL Reference Classification Rules and the other listing the DL Reference Classification Rules Note that for VLANCS service flows the linked uplink and downlink classification rules should be the same This is because the VLANCS classification rules define the CVID Customer VLAN ID that should be the same for uplink and downlink flows These tables include the following parameters Parameter Description UL DL Reference Classification Rule Number The index number of the UL or DL Reference Classification rule An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 6 generated automatically during rule addition 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Rule Name The name of the associated Classific
324. ps Applicable only for DHCP Relay mode The IP address of the external DHCP server 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Ge Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File Parameter Name in File Description dhcpSrvipPoolNetAddr Applicable for IP service groups Applicable only for DHCP Server mode The lowest IP address of address pool to be used for address allocation by local DHCP Service for MS from this Service Group DHCP IP addresses in the pool shall not overlap with the DHCP address pool defined in an existing service group and with IP addresses of host interfaces Bearer External Management Internal Management and Local Management dhcpSrvlpPoolMaxAddr Applicable for IP service groups Applicable only for DHCP Server mode The highest IP address of address pool to be used for address allocation by local DHCP Service for MS from this Service Group DHCP IP addresses in the pool shall not overlap with the DHCP address pool defined in an existing service group and with IP addresses of host interfaces Bearer External Management Internal Management and Local Management dhcpSrvlpMsSubnet Applicable for IP service groups Applicable only in DHCP Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the subnet mask to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept dh
325. qual Time ET scheduling mode in which air resources are being scheduled in a fair manner proportional to the users excess traffic maximum sustained rate maximum reserved rate SLAs Equal Rate ER scheduling mode in which air resources are allocated to users aiming at ensuring data rate fairness between users proportional to their excess traffic SLAs 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Se Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Assuming a sector with diversity different channels conditions of active users ET scheme enables higher aggregate sector throughput at the expense of data rate fairness among users while ER scheduling scheme ensures maximum data rate fairness among users at the expense of lower aggregate sector throughput Using ER scheduling scheme exposes the system to excessive allocation of air resources to highly active users having relatively poorer channel conditions To ensure data rate fairness more resources will to be allocated to these users compared to users with relatively good channel conditions The effect of a small number of such users within the sector will be reflected by reduced aggregate sector throughput as well as degradation of achievable rates for all users To protect against abusing users an instantaneous rate threshold can be defined within the scheduling scheme in which the amount of air resources for users with continuous instantaneous rate below the threshold is being li
326. quipment Manager on page 7 HM Configuration History Request and Report on page 8 Chapter 2 Using the Equipment Manager The Equipment Manager Zul The Equipment Manager For general details on using the Equipment Manager refer to the relevant section in the Management System Manual that covers all details and features common to all product types This Chapter covers some features of the Equipment Manager for the specific product type that may not be applicable for all product types 1 When selecting the applicable device family in the View option the display includes for each BTS the BTS Number This is the BTS Number parameter configured in the device Applicable only for devices with Operational State of Enabled or devices that were reached previously For details on the BTS Number parameter refer to Site General Tab on page 22 Properties section A The available management options right click includes the following options that may not be available for other product types Option Description Performance Opens the Performance Monitoring Viewer for the selected device Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is other than Enabled For more details refer to The Performance Monitoring Viewer on page 270 Multiple Configuration Opens the template based Multiple Configuration Task allowing simultaneous configuration of several d
327. r Description Flow Number The index number of the service flow An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 12 generated automatically during creation of a new service flow Flow ID The flow ID of the service flow for which the service flow configuration mode is enabled By default the table is sorted by the order of Service Flows creation time click once on the table s Flow ID header to sort by ascending order click again to sort by descending order click again to return to default sorting Select an entry to open the Service Flow Parameters Editor and enable the Reference Classification Rule Editor for the selected service flow The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Service Flow Parameters Editor and enable the Reference Classification Rule Editor allowing to configure parameters for the new service flow Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Service Flow Parameters Editor The Service Flow Parameters Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D di Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Flow ID The flow ID of the service flow A number in the range 1 255 unique per service profile The Flow ID of an existing service flow cannot be changed Convergence Sublayer
328. r Description BS ID LSB The unique ID of the BS AU Slot Number The AU slot number When adding a new sector association double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available AUs AU Port Number The AU port number When adding a new sector association available only after selecting an AU Double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ports according to the type of the selected AU 1 4 for a 4 channels AU 1 2 for a 2 channels AU ODU Number The ODU number When adding a new sector association double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ODUs ODU Port Number The ODU port number When adding a new sector association available only after selecting an ODU Double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ports according to the type of the selected ODU 1 2 or 4 Antenna Number The antenna number When adding a new sector association double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available Antennas Antenna Port Number The antenna port number When adding a new sector association available only after selecting an Antenna Double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ports according to the type of the selected Antenna 1 2 or 4 The Site Sector Association table also includes the following buttons Button Description Ad
329. r Interface Page Keep Alive Page ASN GW Pools Page 3 5 1 L1 L2 Connectivity Page The L1 L2 Connectivity page enables viewing modifying defining the various aspects of site connectivity such as the parameters of Ethernet ports VLAN IDs and External Ether Type This section includes L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Micro Outdoor BTS 3 5 1 1 L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW k L e H A S l L1 L2 Connectivity Backhaus Poet Mansgnmere Peet Operational State h Operational State Administrative State Uni D Administrative State Deech Di Negotiation Auto i Negotiation aro E Port Speed Mbps 100 Port Speed Mbps 1 x Duplex Mode Riou Duplex Mode DT D Bearer VLAN ID 1 External WLAN ID 12 Cascade Port External Ether Type wa Je Operaio stake AU Maintenance WAN TO 14 eet gg Port Spoed Mbps 16 D Duplex Mode Dobai vian Trarsiston VLAN ID I Changed to Ha Lopes v m Dorm ic Figure 3 7 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Macro Indoor BTS The L1 L2 Connectivity tab includes the following sections 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gel Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Backhaul Port Cascade Port Management Port External Ether Type AU Maintenance VLAN ID Backhaul VLAN Translation 3 5 1 1 1 Backhaul Port The Backhaul Port section includes the following parameters of
330. r Vice Versa The default is Switch Over the default in the device is Disable Redundancy Indicates whether AAA server redundancy is supported If enabled the ASN GW will try switching to the secondary server if the primary server does not respond and vide versa The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Redundancy cannot be disabled if the Current Server is the Secondary Server 5 2 1 2 AAA Access Tab AAA Goch AAA Recess Mode e Update Fiters By checking on a selected property name you can add E to this Fier LI o Time Zone Offset 5 O wan Classthier Bt Algrenert D Gesetzes LH Figure 5 4 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Access Tab The AAA Access parameters are 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO di Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description GMT Time Zone Offset The time zone offset in seconds from GMT at the NAS The range is from 0 the default to 86400 seconds VLAN Classifier Bit Defines how to transfer VLAN ID between R3 and R6 Alignment E MSB Shift a When transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side the binary value of the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV will be copied and pasted as most significant bits in R6 TLV b When transferring classifier VID value from R6 to R3 the binary value of the 12 the most significant bits in R6 TLV will be copied and pasted as the 12 l
331. r radio links of the same BS and all its neighbors should not transmit to reduce potential interference The Beam Forming mechanism ensures that all neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode will enter into silent mode when necessary A unit operating in Matrix A B mode should enter into silent mode when necessary based on frame number information only if it has neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode The Neighbor Beam Forming parameter Indicates whether any of the neighboring BSs operates in Beam Forming mode The default is No Sounding Shift Used Read only Applicable only for Beam forming DL diversity mode The sounding zone shift used by the Beam Forming mechanism 0 7 MSs are transmitting sounding frames in the uplink to enable the BS to decide the weights to be allocated for downlink transmissions Sounding is sequence of Golay sequence codes The Sounding Shift is the seed for this sequence and different Sounding Shifts are used providing reduced interference among neighboring BSs RCID Usage Each transmitted MAP includes allocations for each MS it served using the MS s CID for identifying each MS The original CID includes 16 bits which is significantly more than practically needed since a maximum of 500 MSs can be served by each BS To reduce overhead a smaller number of bits can be used based on RCID Reduced CID defined in the standard This mechanism can be used only if all MSs served by the
332. r will be displayed in the Filters area Only entries that match all filtering criteria will be updated Parameters at the top section above the separation line cannot be updated and may be used only for filtering NOTE If you do not select any filters all rows of the table in the target devices will be updated with the configured values excluding default pre configured entries in certain tables that cannot be modified 5 1 2 3 After completing configuration of the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The color of the new row will change to black As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table The row will be colored red Actual deletion will take effect after clicking on the Save button Managing Tables in Delete Mode Each row in the table has one or more parameters that provides a unique identification of the entry In Delete mode the row identifiers are not mandatory and will be displayed only for saved entries selected for filtering or update To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row will be added to the table and a row configuration editor will open on the right side enabling you to one or several parameters to be 4Motion and MC
333. rer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab includes the following sections WR Bearer Traffic QoS Rules HM Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 8 3 2 1 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Bearer Traffic QoS Rules The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules section includes the Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table and the QoS Rule Parameters Editor The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table displays the following read only parameters for each existing QoS rule Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule An auto sequential number generated automatically when creating a new rule Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Marking Rule The name of the QoS Marking Rule Select an entry to open the Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Editor allowing to configure parameters for the new rule Up to a maximum of 16383 rules can be defined Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table The QoS Rule Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description QoS Rule Parameters Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS Marking Rule An optional s string of up to 32 characters Rule Status The
334. ress However if they are not located within the same subnet as the new site s External Management Interface IP Address these routes will be added with the same content as above M The management system will automatically change create the Default IP Route If a Default IP Route exists in the golden site file it will be replaced with the following content Destination 0 0 0 0 Mask 0 0 0 0 Next Hop ASNGW Bearer Next Hop npulpRouteNextHop ASNGW bearer lf a Default IP Route does not exist in the golden site file it will be created with the same content as above E The management system will automatically replace all IP Routes in which Next Hop is the ASNGW Bearer Next Hop from golden site file to IP Routes with the Next Hop set to ASNGW Bearer Next Hop from the new file H lf the External Bearer VLAN externalBearerVlan is not equal to the nouBearerVlanld copied from the golden site file then the management system will update the Backhaul VLAN Translation table npuBckhIPortVlanTransTable of the output offline file as follows npuBckhlPortVlanTrnsEnbl enable 1 gt npuBckhlPortVlanTrnsint npuBearerVlanld gt npuBckhlPortVlanTrnsExt externalBearerVlan BR All Tunnel Source IP servicelfTunSrclp parameters in IP in IP Service Interfaces of the offline file will be set to the value of npulplflp ASNGW bearer in the new site INFORMATION The content of BS ASN GW Load B
335. rface Outer VLAN ID any instance of Service Interface VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of a VPWS Mapped Service Group The Outer VLAN ID of an existing Service Interface cannot be changed The range is 1 4094 The default value 0 must be replaced by a valid value Enable Checksum Applicable only for IP in IP service interfaces Indicates whether or not the tunnel checksum feature is enabled yes or no The default is no unchecked Table 3 7 Translation of VLAN ID on VPLS Trunk Service Interface Encapsulatio Outer VLANID Own Action n Mode of VLAN ID of VLAN ID Service of Service of Interface Service Interface Service Interface Group VLAN N A X X No translation of VID Stacked VLAN Z X X No translation of VID On egress Outer VLAN tag is added SVID Z On ingress Outer VLAN tag is removed VLAN N A X Y On egress VID Y changed to VID X On ingress VID X changed to VID Y Stacked VLAN Z X Y On egress VID Y changed to VID X Outer VLAN tag is added SVID Z On ingress VID X changed to VID Y Outer VLAN tag is removed VLAN N A X Untagged On egress VLAN tag is added VID X On ingress VLAN tag is removed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se el 3 7 2 2 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Tabl
336. ription Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Note that the default rules Rule Number 1 and 2 int_default and ext_default respectively cannot be deleted The QoS Rule Parameters Editor displays the following parameters for the new selected rule Parameter Description Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS marking rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The name of an existing rule cannot be modified Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable The default is Enable Condition Rule Applied on Interface The type of interface for which the bearer plane QoS rule is defined Internal R4 R6 tunnel External R1 or ANY The default is ANY The Interface type of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Data Delivery Type The type of service provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR or ANY The default is ANY The Service Flow Data Delivery Type of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Traffic Priority The traffic priority provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule 0 7 or ANY The default is ANY The Service Flow Traffic Priority of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Media Flow Type The media type provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule A value of ANY indicate
337. rking actions to be applied to traffic that meets the rule s parameters A classifier ID cannot be associated with more than one rule Refer to QoS Marking Rules Tab on page 38 for details on configuring marking classifiers and marking actions For each Standard ACL a specific combination of all applicable parameters Source IP Address Source IP Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Mask cannot be defined in more than one rule For each Extended ACL a specific combination of all applicable parameters Source IP Address Source IP Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Mask Minimum Source Port maximum Source Port Minimum Destination Port Maximum Destination Port Protocol cannot be defined in more than one rule 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 46 3 5 2 4 IP Routing Tab The IP Routing tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTSs Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity The IP Routing tab enables viewing modifying entries in the IP Routing table It also enables adding deleting static IP routes H Management Management Interface QoS Marking Rules ACL IP Routing SNM Managers Performance Logg P Roti Destination 10 0 0 254 10 10 120 0 10 10 129 82 10 10 144 35 ECK EE A 6 0 0 0 we Mask Mea Hop 255 295 255 0 10 10 129 254 0 0 0 0 255 295 295 255 10 10 129 254 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 144 254 Geseit Y ch _ Figure 3 13 Manage
338. rom the task 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighboring BS ID LSB 2 6 25 BS Name BS 2 6 25 Current BS Neighborting List Remove BTS Number BTS Name Operator ID BS ID LSB Status 1981 255 243 41 3 3 3 e Gis Figure 3 46 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighbor The Neighboring Task includes the following components Parameter Description Operation The operation to be executed according to the button that initiated the task E Add ANeighboring E Delete Neighboring E Update Neighboring Current BS The BS ID LSB and BS Name of the current BS Neighbor ing List The details of neighboring BSs that will participate in the task The initial list includes the BSs that where selected when the task was initiated You may use the Remove button to remove selected BS s from the list The details for each neighboring BS in the list includes its ID BS ID LSB Site Name and Site ID Site Number The Runtime results displays the task s results Since the operations are mutual If BS1 is a neighbor of BS2 BS2 must be a neighbor of BS1 all operations are performed on both BSs of each pair The Runtime Results display the result for each direction including failure reason for failed operations 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Q Chapter 3 Managing a Sin
339. rovinioning Adminitraton Stourky Management Help S GR cavemen manger x d vecoverrsettnas x D ei isen z A Fiems x Al beiege se x gf network marnenance x Network Maintenance Management operation Ra Al Ms d E Target AD GW IP Address O ASN GW BTS Number O IPU Management IP Address al pas Le Network Martensnce Server 10 10 197 117 User odan Figure 4 4 Network Maintenance All MSs De Registration You can select the serving entity by E ASN GW IP Address the Bearer interface IP address of the target device E ASN GW BTS Number the BTS Number of the target device H NPU Management IP Address the IP address of the interface used for managing the site NPU to which the ASN GW is assigned Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option Click Apply to force de registration of all MSs served by the specified device You can click Home to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Se Chapter 5 Configuring Templates In This Chapter Configuring Templates on page 171 ASN GW Template on page 176 BS Template on page 213 Management Template on page 238 Equipment Template on page 245 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Configuring Templates 5 1 Configuring Templates This section includes RW The Template Configuration
340. rs Bearer Interface Counter Management Initial NE Counters Management Service flows Counters Load Balancing Counter R6 Interface Total Counters R3 Interface Counters R6 Interface BS Counters AAA Counters AAA counters are applicable for all Macro BTSs operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GWs The available AAA counters are Management Provisioned QoS Counters Counter Name Counts the Number of Authentication Access Requests Radius access request messages transmitted Authentication Access Retransmissions Radius access request message retransmissions Authentication Access Challenges Radius access challenge messages received Authentication Access Accepts Radius access accept messages received Authentication Access Rejects Radius access reject messages received Authentication Timeouts Timer expiries while awaiting response for Radius access request message sent Authentication Packets of Unknown types invalid events occurred due to reception of Radius messages MS Re Authntications Changed Profile MS reauthentications with different MS profile received in access accept message Bad Authenticators Radius access accept reject messages received with EAP status mismatch Number of radius access request retries failure Radius access request retry failures 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual
341. rved frais Rate bps Uplink Max Latency ms Vie Telarated iter me Figure 5 18 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab Create Mode The Service Flow table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow Service Profile Config Name The name alias of the Service Profile The Service Flow Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow A unique number in the range from 1 to 255 The Flow ID of an existing Service Flow cannot be updated Service Profile Config Name The name alias of the Service Profile Must be a Service Profile Name that exists in the target device Convergence Sublayer Type Convergence Sublayer Type ipv4cs or vlancs The default is ipv4cs vlancs service flows can be defined only for the Default Service Profile The Convergence Sublayer Type of an existing Service Flow cannot be updated Media Flow Type The type of media carried by the service flow An optional string of up to 15 characters Uplink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and A
342. rvice Group DHCP Function Mode The DHCP Function Mode if applicable The Service Group Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Group Name The name alias of the service Group A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing Service Group cannot be updated in Update Mode may be used only for filtering The default is an empty string which is not a valid value Service Group Type Mandatory for Create Mode The type of an existing Service Group cannot be updated in Update Mode may be used only for filtering The Service Groups type IP VPWS QinQ VPWS Transparent VPWS Mapped VPLS Hub And Spoke The default is IP DHCP Function Mode Applicable only for IP Service Groups Mandatory for Create Mode of an IP Service Group The DHCP Function Mode of an existing Service Group cannot be updated in Update Mode may be used only for filtering The available DHCP Function Mode options E Server The ASN GW function as a DHCP server that allocates an IP address to the MS from the local pool in the non HA mode E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns the MS the IP address that was received from AAA in the MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address receiv
343. s are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D g 5 3 1 3 Base Band Tab The Base Band parameter is Chapter 5 Configuring Templates General Det L pp Base Band L r Frome Structure Triggers BS Template Delte Piters By cichng on a selected property name you can add k to this fiter E Sandaidh Mrr x Figure 5 25 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Base Band Tab Parameter Description Bandwidth The BS channel bandwidth 5 MHz 7 MHz 10MHz The default is 5 MHz 7 MHz is not applicable for units in 2 x GHz bands 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 1 4 Air Frame Structure Tab a Gerrral Del AF Base Boned Aa Frame Structure Triggers Mode t pdate Oie Piters By ceking on a selected property name you can add amp ta this Hert D cea D Preamble Group O Seginent Number LI Frame Number Offset Cito O eg Uplink Du ston stots O Ha Major Groups LI Bask Map Repetition C Downin Data MIMO Mode O Donik Date Zone Perm tabon Base Uplink Feedback Zone Perimation Base Uplink Data Zone Premutation Bas
344. s Interfaces tab enables viewing modifying the parameters of existing service interfaces It also enables adding new service interfaces up to a maximum of 10 and deleting service interfaces A Service Interface defines the parameters of the interface used by the NPU on the network side for services using the applicable Service Interface specified in the applicable Service Group The following types of Service Interface are available BR P in IP The Service Interface defines the parameters on the NPU side of a point to point tunnel to be used for the applicable traffic M VLAN The Service Interface defines the VLAN ID to be added removed by the NPU to from the applicable traffic HM QinQ Applicable only for special applications requiring local support of unauthenticated mode The QinQ Service Interface is applicable only for supporting VLAN CS Service Flows associated with a QinQ Service Group 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D o2 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW E VPLS Trunk The Service Interface defines the VLAN ID s to be added removed by the ASN GW to from the applicable traffic The VPLS Trunk Service Interface is applicable only for supporting Service Flows associated with a VPLS Service Group H Service Group Serve Irkerfaces Service Groups Service Inkerl aces Irkerface Number Service Intefa Type sernce Interface Parameters 1 i Pe gt amp VAN Service Interface Nama
345. s Yes in the device the default is No RCID Usage Each transmitted MAP includes allocations for each MS it served using the MS s CID for identifying each MS The original CID includes 16 bits which is significantly more than practically needed since a maximum of 500 MSs can be served by each BS To reduce overhead a smaller number of bits can be used based on RCID Reduced CID defined in the standard This mechanism can be used only if all MSs served by the BS support RCID When enabled CDs of either 7 or 11 bits will be dynamically used according to the current number of MS served at each given moment The RCID Usage defines whether RCID is enabled or disabled The default is Enable in the device the default is Disable 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Si Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template 5 3 1 5 Triggers Tab RER General Def CRE L uase pand L Frame structure Tnogers Mode Cese QUpdste Dekte PAd Remove Pe d Trigger Name Own CINR Scan request w Id Trigger Name Figure 5 27 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Triggers Tab Each row in the table includes a trigger name To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table The row editor window will open enabling you to select a Trigger Name from the drop down list The Trigger Names must be selected taking into account the relevant existing Trigger Names in the target object
346. s of Pool 1 Pool 2 September 2011 Configuring Templates The BS ASN GW Pools The default status for both September 2011 Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface pools is Disable un checked Page Bearer Tab Managing a Single Device Service Added support for a new type of service September 2011 Group Page Service Interfaces Tab interface VPLS Trunk Two new parameters Encapsulation Mode Outer VLAN ID Updated description configuration rules for Service Interface Number Service Interface Name VLAN ID Total number of service interfaces updated to 80 total number of IP IP VLAN and QinQ service interfaces is limited to a maximum of 10 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Configuring Templates The ASN GW_ Added Encapsulation Type Outer VLAN ID September 2011 Template Service Group Page Service interfaces Tab Updated functionality and description Type Service VLAN ID Updated description Service Interface Name Tunnel Destination IP Default Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask Managing a Single Device Service Updated Service Group Number Name Type September 2011 Group Page Service Groups Tab Service Interface Name Service Time W O IP Address VID Mapping Range Start End Added VLAN ID Multicast Service Flow parameters Configuring Templates The ASN GW Added VLAN ID Traffic Priority Maximum September 2011
347. s that this parameter will be ignored A string of 1 to 30 characters or ANY The default is ANY The Service Flow Media Flow Type of an existing rule cannot be modified Action Outer DSCP Marking The Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value to be used for marking the packets if the packet complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from O to 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic that complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from O to 7 The default is O 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual 3 7 4 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Hot Lining Page Hot Lining provides a WiMAX operator with the capability to efficiently address issues with users that would otherwise be unauthorized to access packet data services When Hot Lining is enabled the ASN GW implements UL DL traffic filters These traffic filters are dynamically applied and removed per MSID Triggers for filter application removal are relevant RADIUS messages from the AAA server Filter s action on traffic shall be one of the following pass drop or HTTP redirect the traffic The ASN GW shall apply the pre configured profile according to the Hotline Profile ID as delivered from the AAA server If filtering is applied uplink subscriber s packet that does not match any UL filter rule shall be dropped Downlink subscriber s packet that d
348. s that will participate in the Multiple Configuration task using the template In Create Mode a Trigger Name that already exists in the managed object will be rejected In Update or Delete Mode a Trigger Name that does not exist in the managed object will be rejected The Triggers Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Trigger Name Mandatory for all Modes The Trigger Name that includes the Trigger Type and Action For details refer to the table below Trigger Value The threshold value for the trigger For CINR triggers the range is 64 to 63 5 in steps of 0 5 dB For RSSI triggers the range is 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 dBm For Distance triggers the range in meters is 0 3400 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 10 MHz 0 6800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 5 MHz 0 4800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 7 MHz 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual ei D 5 3 2 Chapter 5 Configuring Templates BS Template Trigger Type Action Trigger Condition Own CINR Scan request lt dB Scan Request The CINR at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI Scan request lt dBm Scan Request The RSSI at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dBm Distance Scan Request m Scan Request The Serving BS distance from the MS calculated by measuring the round trip delay is above the Trigger threshold in meter
349. s value of the counter BR The scale value for the graph see details below To view the graph of a counter Select the check box to the left of a counter to add its graph to the graph section and view its details The color to be used in the graph for the selected counters is displayed to the right of the counter To change the color of a counter s graph Click on the color display on the right side of the selected counter The Pick a Color window opens allowing you to change the color s properties Deselect the check box to terminate the on line display of the counter Select again to continue the display INFORMATION You can also select deselect all the counters in a group using the check box next to the group s or device s name To optimize the value vertical axis of a counter The values scale vertical axis is fixed between 100 to 100 or between 0 to 100 for a Positive Only graph Some counters may have values that either exceed this range or are too small The value scale of each counter is displayed to the right of the counter s name the default is 1 0 To change the value scale of a counter double click on the relevant Scale entry and choose the desired scale from the scale drop down list that will be displayed You can use the current graph s value displayed in the Value 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Cd Chapter 7 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Counters Selection Section
350. same as the Secondary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces The default is 172 16 0 10 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Enable Redundancy Indicates whether AAA server redundancy is supported If enabled the ASN GW will try switching to the secondary server if the primary server does not respond and vide versa The default is Disable Note Redundancy cannot be disabled if the Current Server is the Secondary Server If Redundancy is enabled and the Current Server is the Secondary Server use the Switch Over option to switch to the Primary Server before disabling redundancy If Redundancy is enabled the IP Address of the Active server Primary or Secondary cannot be modified Secondary Server IP The IPv4 address of the secondary AAA server Cannot be the same as Address the Primary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces 0 0 0 0 the default means no secondary server Must be set to a valid IP address if Redundancy is enabled Switch Over Enable and click Apply to switch from the Primary Server to Secondary Server or Vice Versa The default is Disable 3 7 2 Service Group Page The Service Group page enables managing the service interfaces and service groups The Service Group page includes the following tabs WR Service Interfaces Tab M Service Groups Tab 3 7 2 1 Service Interfaces Tab The Service
351. select any existing entry 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D g
352. ser Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW To delete a service profile right click the required service profile entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation Note that the Default pre configured service profile cannot be deleted 3 7 5 3 2 Service Profile Page The Service Profiles page enables viewing the Service Profiles in the device s database defining new Service Profiles and editing or deleting existing Service Profiles Nome yen Profle atus Enable ji Service Profiles Parameters e e ENEE Service Plow __FlowNurber Awb Service Plow Parameters E z pop ae le Besseres H Convergence Sibiya ng es E Medis Flow Type Refererce Service Group Iw Uplink Cowelink Data Delivery Type E Lei Be E Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps 250 k 250 kl Min Reserved Trafhe Rate kbps 2 Traffic Prorky 9 E D S Max Lee ms S Tolerated Mier ms bk bk Unecboted Grant Interval ms bk Reference Gesin ae Rude U Reference Classification Rule Number Ride are D Reference Class ixation Rude Number Rude Here Wis R 2 Seam vi n Dore n Figure 3 39 Service Profile Page The Service Profiles page includes the following sections H General Service Profile Parameters RW Service Flow Table E Service Flow Parameters Editor WH Reference Classification Rule Section 3 7 5 3 2
353. service interface The device can hold up to a total of 80 service interfaces However the total number of IP IP VLAN and QinQ service interfacess is limited to a maximum of 10 Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table A service Interface associated to a Service Group cannot be deleted A QinQ service interface associated to a service flow cannot be deleted INFORMATION _ The Bearer Interface IP Address see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 55 must be configured pa prior to creating any IP in IP or VLAN service interfaces The Service Interface Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Configurable only when adding a new service interface Description An optional brief description of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters The default is null Type The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN QinQ or VPLS Trunk Configurable only when adding a new service interface The default is IP in IP Tunnel Source IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface Read only The source IPv4 address that indicates the point of origination of the tunnel for the service interface Set to the value of the Bearer Interface IP Address Tunnel Destination IP Applicable only for IP i
354. should manually specify the full path and file name If the selected action is Delete AU Version from NPU the drop down list includes all files in the NPUs of the managed BTSs TFTP IP Address The IP address of the TFTP server on which the file to be downloaded is stored This address is set by default to the management system s internal TFTP server IP address but can be changed to any external TFTP server IP address See also in previous section BTS Software Upgrade a note on proper process of modifying the TFTP Server IP Address You can select both the Download to Shadow and Switch Over options In this case the Switch Over action will take place only after successful completion of the Load to Shadow action Selecting Delete AU version from NPU together with Download To Shadow and or Switch Over are not valid options 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si Gei Chapter 8 Tasks Software Upgrade Task The Select Equipment table displays the devices that will participate in the task The displayed functionality depend on the selected action s If the selected action is Delete AU Version from NPU the table displays all the NPUs that will participate in the task and the AU software files stored in each of these NPUs Click on the Add button to open the BTS Selector allowing you to add NPU s to the task If Download to Shadow and or Switch Over action is selected the table displays all the AUs that w
355. sk is Inactive the Backup Task Editor for the selected task is displayed 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 8 Tasks Backup Configuration Task Backup Configuration Task Name backup_task_20090827130208 File Type Site Configuration Backup current device configuration Backup an older device configuration Source Equipment BTS Number NE Type IP Address 233 4M Macro BTS 10 10 144 35 DAAA kel EE ea Figure 8 4 Backup Task Editor The Backup Task editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created backup_task_ lt yyyymmddhhmmss gt Note that when using the Task Wizard the default task name automatically replaces the name selected in the first Create New Task step File Type The type of backup file E Site Configuration The entire site configuration E Logging The NPU SW modules log files 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual g D Ka amp 293 Chapter 8 Tasks Backup Configuration Task Parameter Description Backup Current Older Configuration Options Available below the File Type selection field only if the selected File Type is Site Configuration Select one of the following E Backup Current Device Configuration Select to retri
356. stance of Service Interface Outer VLAN ID VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management External Management and AU Maintenance interfaces and any VID Map Range of other existing VPWS Mapped Service Group serviceGrpVlanid Applicable only for VPLS Hub And Spoke Service Groups The own VLAN ID of the Service Group The range is 0 4094 0 means untagged The default is 0 Different VPLS Service Groups may have the sane value of their own VLAN ID including multiple VLAN untagged VPLS Service Groups 6 3 4 8 Additional Rules for Offline Configuration Files HM The management system will automatically change create IP Routes for Trap Managers Remote Log Server Software Upgrade Server and in a Mini Centralized ASN GW SNTP Servers Relevant route lines from the golden site file will be replaced with the following content if they are not located at the same subnet with External Management Interface IP Address Destination Server s IP address Mask 255 255 255 255 Next Hop npulpRouteNextHop External mgmt IP Routes for Trap Managers and or Remote Log Server and or Software Upgrade Server and or in a Mini Centralized ASN GW SNTP Servers may not be included in the golden site file because they are located within the same subnet as the golden site file s External Management Interface IP 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 6 The Mass Configuration Wizard Excel File Add
357. status of the rule Enable or Disable The default is Enable Condition Service Flow Data Delivery Type The Service Flow Type for data delivery services uGS TVR nRTVR BE eRTVR or ANY The default is ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority The priority of Service Flow traffic 0 7 or ANY The default is ANY Enable Service Flow Media Flow Type Indicates whether the condition for Service Flow Media Flow Type is enabled or disabled If enabled the Service Flow Media Flow Type will be considered when looking for a match The default is Disable Service Flow Media Flow Type The Service Flow Media Flow Type as defined in ASN GW or AAA server Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Action Outer DSCP Marking The DSCP value to be used for marking the outer IP header IP GRE The range is 0 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 3 8 3 2 2 Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules The Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Diffserv Code Point DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 4Mo
358. t The range is from O to 20 in 0 1 dB steps Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 5 Location Longitude deg The longitude of the antenna The format is Wl mmm a Wis longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 000 000E Latitude deg The latitude of the antenna The format is Il mmm a Il is longitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is S south or N north Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 00 000N Tower Height m The height of the antenna above the ground in meters The range is from 0 to 500 Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 3 7 ASN GW The ASN GW node applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GW The ASN GW enables defining various parameters pertaining to the Access Service Network ASN Gateway functionality of the managed device The ASN GW node includes the following pages E AAA Page Service Group Page QoS Marking Page Hot Lining Page SFA Page 3 7 1 AAA Page The AAA page enables the configuration of general RADIUS parameters and the AAA client The RADIUS c
359. t Login Protocol External SNMP UDP 161 8 8 0 Management An ACL can be attached to the ASN GW In BTS equipment it can also be attached to the AUs or both ASN GW and AUs Excluding ACL 199 that cannot be attached to any interface You can create the following types of rules for an ACL excluding ACL 199 RB Allow Indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUS RB Drop Indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is dropped and not allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUs You can configure multiple rules for each ACL the priority for these rules is applied with respect to the sequence in which these rules are configured By default in BTS equipment traffic towards the AUs is not restricted This is implemented through the pre configured ACL 1 which is available by default ACL 1 is attached to All AU with Rule Action Allow Source IP Address Any and Destination IP Address Any Several additional default ACLs are created automatically to allow some restricted traffic towards the NPU These ACL rules are applied automatically at the time of NPU startup or upon a change of IP address of various interfaces These ACLs cannot be deleted or modified The automatically created ACLs are Standard ACLs 96 97 98 and Extended ACL 186 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity NOTE Although they are always supported
360. t required after changing Bearer Interface IP Address ACL Page Updated with details on automatically created August 2009 ACLs Management Page Performance Tab Collection of Counters Groups that are not fully August 2009 supported by the device cannot be enabled Removed Performance Collection Interval Management Page Logging Tab Updated description of Server IP August 2009 NPU Page Added Reset To Factory With Connectivity August 2009 option 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual amp Document History Topic Description Date Issued Power Supply Page Updated options for PIU HW Version 58Amp 35Amp Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009 New AU Window Creating a New AU Updated options for AU Type only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable Removed Ports and Bandwidth parameters August 2009 AL Slot Page Card Properties Tab Updated Required and Installed sections E Updated options for AU Type only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable E Removed Ports and Bandwidth parameters Added Maintenance Connectivity parameters August 2009 New ODU window ODU number is 1 28 for Indoor BTS and 1 24 for Outdoor BTS August 2009 ODU Page Removed Heater Existence Removed Enable Tx August 2009 GPS Page Removed GPS Adapter Required August 2009 Power Feeder Page Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009
361. tch is applied Rule Name The unique per hot line profile name of the rule A string of 1 30 characters The name of an existing filter rule cannot be modified Direction The direction for which the rule should be applied Uplink or Downlink The default is Uplink IP Address If Direction is Downlink then this is the downlink Source IP Address If Direction is Uplink then this is the uplink Destination IP Address 255 255 255 255 means not applicable ignore this condition The default is 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask associated with the configured IP Address The default is 255 255 255 255 IP Protocol The IP protocol number 1 255 255 means any ignore this condition The default is 255 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 7 5 3 7 5 1 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Source Port Start The minimum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Source Port Stop The maximum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is 65535 Destination Port Start The minimum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Destination Port Stop The maximum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 65535 DSCP Start The minimum value of DSCP range The default is 0 DSCP Stop The maximum value of DSCP range The default is 63 Filter Action Action to be performed on packets that m
362. tdoor BTS the range is 1 9 11 100 110 4094 and 4096 for No VLAN The default is 14 3 6 1 3 2 2 AU Control Tab The Control tab lists the parameters that enable controlling operation of the AU AU 4 Channels Slot 2 Card Properties Control Last Reset Reason Shutdown Operation Normal opran w Shutdown Power AU to COU Port Jus ugeet x Port No Stetdown E Ports No Stetdown Porta No Stetdown 1 sst e Aey LH GT Figure 3 24 AU Slot Page Control Tab 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Control tab includes the following options Parameter Description Last Reset Reason Read only The reason for the last reset of the AU Possible reasons include Unknown Health Monitoring Failed User Initiated Configuration Failure Internal Errors Shutdown Operation The type of operation to be performed In a Macro BTS the options are Normal Operation Shutdown disable power to card or Reset The default is Normal Operation In a Micro BTS the options are listed below Shutdown Operation options in a Micro BTS are Option Description Shutdown The shutdown operation will shut down the entire site IMPORTANT The system cannot be re activated from remote To re activate the system turn off the power to the unit and then turn it on again Reset The site will be restarted All changes in p
363. te 5 5 Equipment Template The Equipment Template comprises the Shelf page that comprises the following tabs E NPU System Management Tab Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS WR AU Control Tab Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS RW AU Control Tab Micro Outdoor BTS HM Shutdown Power AU to ODU Tab 5 5 1 NPU System Management Tab Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS WAU System Management L AU Control Shutdown Power Au to COU Mode se Updere Delete Fkers By age on a selected property name you can add amp to this fiter O Shutdown Operation v Figure 5 44 The Equipment Template Shelf Page NPU System Management Tab The NPU System Management tab includes the Shutdown Operation parameter with the following options Option Description Shutdown The shutdown operation will shut down the entire site IMPORTANT The system cannot be re activated from remote To re activate the system turn off the power to the unit and then turn it on again Reset The site will be restarted All changes in parameters that require reset will take effect after restart 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates Equipment Template Option Description Reset To Factory Default The system will be restarted with factory default configuration IMPORTANT All configurations will be deleted This also means loosing the ability to manage the unit from remote L
364. ted mode is applicable for both uplink and downlink schedulers The default is Equal Rate Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate E None No Protection E Low Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with very low DL transmission Rate H Medium Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low DL transmission Rate The default is None 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 52 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Scheduler UL Abuse Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate Protection Level E None No Protection E Low Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with very low UL transmission Rate BW Medium Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low UL transmission Rate The default is None 3 8 3 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page The R6 R8 Bearer Interface page includes the following tabs WH R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab WH R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab 3 8 3 1 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab The Bearer tab enables defining the Bearer Interface of the BS parameters Gel P baam R6 R8 Bearer Interface 255 243 41 11 11 11 Bearer QoS Marking Rules Bearer Interface 1P Address 192 168 459 151 1P Subnet Mask C ess E Dafa Gatoway IT mieaee Wan Ip Del aut Gateway Connectivit
365. terface Identifier The default is an empty string which is not a valid value Description An optional brief description of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters The default is null Type Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Mandatory for Create Mode The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN QinQ VPLS Trunk The default is IP in IP Tunnel Destination IP Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for IP in IP service interface Mandatory for Create Mode of an IP in IP service interface The destination IPv4 address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IPs Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Shall not be in the subnet of any Mgmt interface i e Local External and Internal The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface Enable Checksum Applicable only for IP in IP service interfaces Indicates whether or not the tunnel checksum feature is enabled yes or no The default is no 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Descriptio
366. th a single Sector In the current release a specific BS can only be associated with a single AU and vice versa If in a certain entry BS 66053 is associated with AU 1 BS 66053 cannot be associated with another AU and AU 1 cannot be associated with another BS Two ODUs associated with the same AU for Beam Forming support must be in the same frequency band This is applicable for 2x2 and 4x2 ODUs that support Beam Forming Site Sector Association in a Micro Outdoor BTS Site Sector 1 Ske Sector Definition Nam SanpieData rsch deg with 1 deg Ske Sector Assodation BS IDLSB AU Slot Number AU Port Number Rado Number Rado Port Number Antenna Mate Aeterna Port Number 83 88 63 1 1 1 1 1 i Lee 1 2 2 t 1 lol cP Betresh a appin Dore t Figure 3 57 Site Sector Page Micro Outdoor BTS 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D hei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Sector The Site Sector Association table in a Micro Outdoor BTS is created automatically based on the relevant defined objects The table includes the following read only parameters for each of the two site sector associations Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique ID of the BS The same for both entries AU Slot Number 1 for both entries AU Port Number 1 and 2 Radio Number 1 and 2 Radio Port Number 1 for both entries Antenna Number The antenna number 1 and 2 if two 1 port antennas are define
367. the binary value of the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV will be copied and pasted as most significant bits in R6 TLV b When transferring classifier VID value from R6 to R3 the binary value of the 12 most significant bits in R6 TLV will be copied and pasted as the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV E LSB The whole 16 bit value of the relevant TLV will be transferred without any change when transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side and from R6 to R3 The default is MSB Shift RADIUS Shared Secret The shared secret between the AAA client and the AAA server s A string of 1 to 49 characters The default is default This is a write only parameter not displayed to the user Source IP Address The interface providing RADIUS client functionality The available options are Bearer and External Management The default is Bearer Accounting UDP Port Read only The port used for accounting messages 1813 Authentication UDP Port Read only The port used for authentication messages 1813 The AAA Client parameters are Parameter Description Current Server A read only display of the current active server being used primary or Secondary Primary AAA Name The name of the AAA Server In the current release supporting a single client this is a read only parameter default Primary Server IP Address The IPv4 address of the primary AAA server Cannot be the
368. the automatically created ACLs 96 97 98 and 186 are not displayed by the management system 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual All the following automatically created standard default ACLs are attached to the NPU virtual interface and include a single Permit rule Table 3 1 Default Standard ACLs ACL Number Rule Action Source IP Address Destination IP Address ACL 96 not Allow Any Internal Management IP address applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW ACL 97 Allow Any External Management IP address ACL 98 Allow Any Local Management IP address The default Extended ACL 186 attached to the NPU virtual interface includes the following Allow rules allowing certain traffic towards the Bearer interface Table 3 2 Rules of Default Extended ACL 186 Rule Action Source IP Address Source Port Destination IP Address Destination Port Protocol Allow Any Any Bearer IP address Any ICMP 1 Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 2231 used for WiMAX ASN Control Plane Protocol UDP 17 Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 1812 1813 used for RADIUS Authenticatio n and Accounting UDP 17 Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 69 used for TFTP UDP 17 Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 1022 1023 used for software download UDP 17 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectiv
369. the backhaul DATA Ethernet port Parameter Description Operational State Read only The operational status of the Ethernet port Unlock Up or Lock Down Administrative State The administrative status of the port Unlock Up or Lock Down Configurable only if Connectivity Mode see Section 3 5 2 1 1 1 is set to Out Of Band The default is Unlock Up Negotiation The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual The default is Auto Port Speed The port speed to be used for the physical interface Configurable only if Negotiation is set to Manual The available options are 10 100 and 1000 Mbps The default is 100 Mbps Duplex Mode The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Duplex The default is Full Duplex Configurable only if Negotiation is set to Manual and Port Speed is not set to 1000 If Port Speed is set to 1000 Duplex Mode is set to Full Duplex Bearer VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the bearer interface used for enabling bearer IP domain connectivity When the Unified connectivity mode is selected the NMS server is also connected using the bearer interface The available range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 11 Configurable only in a Macro BTS operating in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology see Section 3 4 1 2 In a Mini Centralized ASN GW and a Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topolog
370. the same Classification Rule should be set to enable automatically enabled in the device Protocol should be set to either 6 TCP or 17 UDP 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template 5 2 4 8 Classification Rule Destination Port Tab a PAG Rules Class icehon Config Claseficeton Rule Protocol lsssfication Rule Source Access Classticabon fide Destnabon Aiden Clasaficabon Rule Source Peet Cinssfcabon E lt gt Mode Create e Dekte add ve D Revert Ti Clasethcation Config Name Td Gesikan Config Name P A d From is S te ug Enable TCP UDP Destination Port v 17 pel v save Done Figure 5 15 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Port Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Destination Port tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Destination Port parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Destination Port table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Destination Port Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rul
371. tic 2 Parameter Name in File Description radiusNasld The unique identifier of the ASN GW NAS Sent in Access Request message only if configured A string of up to 64 characters Must be unique in the managed network npulplflp ASNGW bearer The Source IP Address of the ASN GW Bearer Interface Must be unique in the network npulplfMask ASNGW bearer The IP subnet mask of the ASN GW Bearer Interface npulpRouteNextHop ASNGW bearer The Next Hop Default Gateway IP Address of the ASN GW Bearer Interface This parameter affects automatic management by the management system of IP routes as described in Section 6 3 4 8 below INFORMATION f the Connectivity Mode is either In Band or Out of Band npuMgmtConctMode inband 1 or outban 2 the subnet of the ASN GW Bearer Interface should not include the IP Addresses of Trap Managers Remote Log Server Software Upgrade Server and in a Mini Centralized ASN GW SNTP Servers copied from the golden site file 6 3 4 5 External Bearer VLAN External Bearer VLAN externalBearerVlan is applicable only for Network Elements operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology npuBootupMode asngwStatic 2 and for Network Elements operating in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology npuBootupMode transparent 3 if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified nouMgmtConctMode unified 3 Parameter Name in File Description externalBearerVian The VLAN ID of the bearer interface should not conflict w
372. tion o ny Tx Power disa EA HW Version xs HW Revision a Wa Card HPA HW Verson 1020 HCO SW Version 110 CD SW version 3 Serial Number OOU Status ele Dore erst ot Le Figure 3 26 ODU Page The ODU page includes the following sections E General E Ports General The General section is divided into sub sections The Required section enables viewing editing the required Type of the ODU It also provide read only properties of the ODU based on the required type Parameter Description ODU Type The required ODU type The required ODU Type of an associated ODU cannot be modified The Type of an ODU that is not associated to any sector can be updated using the drop down menu that includes a list of currently available ODU Types Frequency Band Read only The frequency band supported by the required ODU Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power Read only The maximum Tx power available for the required ODU Type in dBm Port Configuration Read only The Port Configuration of the required ODU Type 1x1 2x2 or 4x2 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Installed section displays read only information about the actual Type and the properties of the actual ODU Type These details are available only for an existing and connected ODU that is associated to a sector Parameter Description ODU Type The installed ODU type or ODU
373. tion 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D oO 3 6 1 2 2 1 3 6 1 3 3 6 1 3 1 gt Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Automatic Configuration Backup The daily scheduled time for the automatic configuration backup is indicated in the Daily Backup Time text boxes in the Automatic Configuration Backup section The format is hh mm where hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 The default is 00 00 AU Not applicable for a Mini Centralized ASN GW From the navigation tree of a managed Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS you can create new AU entities or delete an existing AU entity refer to Creating Deleting an AU The AU node includes an AU lt Type and Slot gt Page for each created AU In a Micro Outdoor BTS there is always a single object Micro ODU Slot 1 representing the entire BTS Creating Deleting an AU AU object creation deletion is applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS In a Micro Outdoor BTS the AU object is created automatically and cannot be deleted To create a new AU 1 Right click the AU sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New AU window You can also double click on an empty module in the Equipment View Page see Chassis View Macro Indoor BTS on page 18 or Components View Macro Outdoor BTS on page 19 to open the New AU window for the selected slot See table below for mapping of Outdoor Macro BTS AUs to slot numbers Table 3 4 Mapping of Outd
374. tion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 9 3 9 1 3 9 2 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Site Sector Site Sector Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW From the navigation tree for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS you can create new ODU entities or delete an existing ODU entity see Creating Deleting a Site Sector below The Site Sector node includes a Site Sector lt gt Page for each configured site sector Up to 6 site sectors numbered 1 to 6 can be defined for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS In a Micro Outdoor BTS there is a single automatically configured Site Sector page Creating Deleting a Site Sector To add a site sector right click the Site Sector node in the navigation tree and select Create Site Sector Mandatory Parameters Site Sector Number SiteSector 2 ly ES Figure 3 55 New Site Sector Window In the New Site Sector window select the mandatory Site Sector Number the available options include only unassigned numbers and click OK You should configure additional properties in the Site Sector page that is added to the navigation tree To delete a site sector right click the required Site Sector sub node in the navigation tree and select Delete Site Sector lt gt Page The Site Sector lt gt page enables defining site sector general properties and associations 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Singl
375. tion rules 4 Management Management Imerface QoS Marking Rides ACL IP Routing SNMP Managers Performance Logging Marking Actions f Adin ID I Fi Ose Priority 1 DSCP amp Pricey 7 7 DSP amp Pricey 7 7 3 OSCR amp Priorky 7 7 4 DSCP amp Pricey H o 5 OSCE amp Pricey D o H OSCR amp Prieeky D 9 7 DSCP amp Pricey o o 6 DSP amp Pricey 8 Don Prieky 7 7 Adadi Delete QoS Marking Classifiers fi Classifier 1D Action E 1 1 3 3 4 4 6 H B H 9 Gd Pt Betresh appin Dorr Figure 3 11 Management Page QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab includes the following sections WR Marking Actions HM QoS Marking Classifiers 3 5 2 2 1 Marking Actions The Marking Actions table lists the class maps that define the DSCP and or VLAN priority bits to be applied for signaling and management traffic originating from the NPU that match relevant criteria The Marking Actions table includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Se ei 3 5 2 2 2 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Action ID Read only The system generated auto sequential ID number Flag Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry Defines the type of QoS parameters to be applied appropriate QoS handling of the relevant flow The option are DSCP
376. tiportv Description lt TD lt TD l lt Specification Electrical Down Tilt o deg Installation Mechanical Down Tilt o deg Heading H deg Cable Loss 0 5 dB Location Longitude 000 U G00 VE deg Latitude oo j GOO N jai deg Tower Height o m elete Figure 3 30 Antenna Page The Antennas List includes the following read only parameters for each defined antenna Parameter Description Antenna Number The index number of the antenna Antenna Product Type The type of antenna Product ID Select an entry to open the Antenna Parameters Editor allowing you to view modify the selected antenna parameters The following buttons are available below the Antennas List 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the Antennas List The Antenna Parameters Editor will open with default values enabling to define the parameters for the new antenna After completing the definition process and pressing Apply the new antenna will be added to the list Its number will be the first free number The list can include up to 28 antennas for a Macro Indoor BTS up to 24 antennas for a Macro Outdoor BTS and up to 2 antennas for Micro Outdoor BTS Delete Deletes the selected entr
377. to Enable uplink multicast frames will be forwarded to both the Multicast port and the VPLS trunk port of the VPLS instance If set to Disable multicast frames will be forwarded only to the VPLS trunk port The default is Enabled 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template INFORMATION OR A Service Group cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a Service Flow N A Service Group with an associated VLAN Service Interface cannot be deleted if the Service VLAN is set to enable 5 2 3 QoS Marking Page Mode ege Godse Delete Pa HK Kem D Revert T maring Rule Name i feign A L Rude Applied on interface O Service Plow Date Delrvery Type v O Service Flow Tratti Priorty x Figure 5 7 The ASN GW Template QoS Marking Page Create Mode The QoS Marking table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule The QoS Marking Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing QoS Marking Rule cannot be updated 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 5 Confi
378. to be suppressed 1 20 Mandatory when creating a new rule The default is 1 INFORMATION An existing PHS Rule cannot be updated p A PHS Rule that is associated to a Classification Rule cannot be deleted 5 2 4 3 Classification Config Tab SEA Corfig pt Rules Caseabon Corfa Classficabon Rule Protocol Glasafication Ride Source Address Classfication Rude Destination Address Class caton Rude source Port c lt 2 Mode Geste QUe Q Dete CEA Krewe C revert VY tome w Name R LI Preety S O oS Range From e O Tops To S LI TOs pak fe g tne P tos v O PHS Rue Name E Tyre ze Figure 5 10 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Config Tab Create Mode The Classification Config table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Name The name alias of the Rule The Classification Config Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Si Se Q Chapter 5 Configuring Templates ASN GW Template Parameter Description Name The name alias of the Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing Rule cannot be updated Priority The priority level assigned to the classification rule The range is 0 255 The default is O TOS Range From and TOS Ap
379. to reset the AU after completing all modifications refer to AU Control Tab on page 69 Some BS parameters should be advertised to all neighbors If a pop up message indicating the need for updating neighbors appeared during modification of parameters do not forget to update all neighbors after completing all modifications refer to Neighbor List on page 142 3 8 1 ei In addition from the navigation tree you can create new BS entities or delete an existing BS entity see Creating Copying Deleting a BS below Note that you can create and delete also the single BS of the Micro Outdoor BTS required for defining changing the BS ID Creating Copying Deleting a BS To create a new BS 1 Right click the BS node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New BS window 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS t Mandatory Parameters BS ID LSB Operator ID 255 243 41 ES Figure 3 40 New BS Window 2 Configure the mandatory identification parameters of the BS in the New BS window Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from O to 255 Operator ID The unique Identifier of the wireless network operator The same Op
380. unity d pubb private Add Manager osiot H SNMP Trap Managers BTS IP Address Port Number Community i Enable Ste Traps 10 10 144 3 i62 mtd Enable 10 10 187 116 162 D se Frable 17 Seel e m _ Figure 3 14 Management Page SNMP Managers Tab The SNMP Managers tab includes the following sections E SNMP Managers E SNMP Trap Managers 3 5 2 5 1 SNMP Managers An SNMP Manager comprises a pair of SNMP Communities Read Community and Write Community A management station is permitted to manage the BTS using SNMP only if it uses one of the configured SNMP Communities or a pair of SNMP Communities A maximum of five SNMP Managers can be configured If the maximum number is reached the Add Manager button becomes inactive The SNMP Managers table includes the following fields for each authorized SNMP Manager Parameter Description Manager Number The index number of the SNMP Manager Read Community The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is public Write Community The SNMP Write Community string allowing execution of SNMP Set and Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is private The SNMP Managers section also includes the following buttons 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D Gel Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Con
381. unter group selection section the counters selection section and the graph section For convenient viewing of the required information you can change the relative sizes of the sections by dragging the line separating them In addition there are several general control buttons at the bottom side of the window Ru Interface Traffic Statistic LS ste 77 Ga ASN GW eps O 851 4 217 Le 65 1 4 20 Name Value Scale 100 ESP UU Gabriel 2 3_2 58F PM Monitoring S RI Interface Traffic Statistic n G Postive Only G Number of OL bursts tran H 1 0 CU Number of DL bursts tran o i show Legend C Number of OL bursts tran H 1 7 Management NE Report Number of DL bursts trani o 1 t i fal amber of Total Dt bursts W 12 2 1 so D Graph 30 Controls e o Counter Group Counters Jii Graphs Area Selection Selection 20 40 50 i fa 16 37 00 16 38 00 16 39 00 Number of Total DL bursts transferred Poet Counters are shown with actual values All other counters are calculated as delta between current and previous values divided by collection tine Poling interval sec 5 sl Aes General Controls Ess i O b s el Figure 7 1 The Performance Monitoring Viewer M The Counters Group Selection Section on page 273 M The Counters Selection Section on page 274 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Se Chapter 7 The Performance Monitor
382. use the commana npu config connectivity mode outband 3 VLANs Translation In Band Connectivity Mode The Data port operates in VLAN aware bridging mode tagged trunk mode The values configured for VLAN ID s used on this port are the VLAN IDs used internally These are the VLAN ID for the bearer IP interface the default is 11 and in In Band Connectivity mode the VLAN ID of the external management IP interface the default is 12 When using In Band connectivity via the Data port if the value of the VLAN ID used for management in the backbone differs from the value configured for the external management interface the external management VLAN ID should be translated accordingly It is recommended to configure also VLAN translation for the bearer interface To enable VLAN translation and configure the required VLANs translation run the following commands the examples are for backhaul Data VLAN ID 30 and Management VLAN ID 31 assuming the default VLAN IDs for external management and bearer interfaces a Enable the Data port configuration mode npu config interface gigabitethernet 0 10 b Enable VLAN translation npu config if vlan mapping enable 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery c Translate data VLAN 11 to the backhaul data VLAN 30 npu config if vlan mapping 11 30 d Translate management VLAN 12 to the backhaul management VLAN 31 npu config if vlan mapping 12 31 e E
383. ust 2009 Updated range for Center Frequency Radio Basic Page Air Fame Structure Removed Enable Uplink Sub Channel Rotation August 2009 General Tab 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Q Document History Topic Description Date Issued Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Removed Map Size added new First Zone August 2009 Zones Tab parameters Minimum Size Maximum Size Maximum Map Size Added Uplink Data Zone Basic Rate Added Downlink Data Zone Basic Rate for Management Downlink Data Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Feedback Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Data Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Data Zone Start Allocation were removed Removed Dynamic Permutation parameters moved to Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab Radio Basic Page Diversity Tab Moved to Radio Advanced Page August 2009 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab New Tab name was Handover tab August 2009 Added Neighbor column to Triggers table Updated parameters in Neighbor List table Updated button name Choose Neighbor changed to Add Entry Add details on Neighboring Task Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab Updated value range for Start of Ranging August 2009 Codes Removed consistency rule Updated value range for IR CDMA Allocation Period Removed Contention Based Reservation Timeout Number of Codes Initial Backoff Window Size Final Backoff Window Size PR CDMA Allocation Peri
384. value range for Lease Time Added rule for DHCP Server IP Address Pool configuration Add rule for Renewal Time configuration Added general description of service groups Updated description of Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address SFA Page PHS Rule Tab Updated range for PHS Rule Name August 2009 SFA Page Classification Rule Tab Updated range for Classification Rule Name August 2009 Added configuration rules for Layer 3 and Layer 4 classifiers 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual SN Q Document History Topic Description Date Issued Service Profile Page Removed Uplink Downlink SDU Size August 2009 Updated range for Service Profile Name Unsolicited Grant Interval uplink is not applicable for RTVR Traffic Priority not applicable for UGS Updated range for Max Sustained Traffic Rate Min Reserved Traffic Rate Added general description of service profiles and service flows Updated description of Reference Service Interface ASN GW Keep Alive Page New Feature August 2009 BS Node Added a note regarding the need to reset the August 2009 AU and or update neighbors after modifying certain parameters Create BS Updated process no need to click Apply on August 2009 Radio Advanced and Connectivity pages after completing configuration of mandatory parameters Copy BS New feature August 2009 Radio Basic Page General Tab Added Idle Mode parameters Aug
385. variSTAR AlvariCRAFT and with the operation and administration of 4Motion BTS system components and or the Mini Centralized ASN GW For more information refer to the AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT User Manual and to the relevant equipment System Manuals In this manual Network Management System refers to AlvariSTAR and Local CRAFT Utility refers to AlvariCRAFT Unless otherwise stated all features are applicable to both AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT Limitations on AlvariCRAFT due to the single device restriction are noted in a Note specific to the application as follows This feature is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Contents Contents Chapter 1 Enabling Deep cccsiiccscisscensssntincnccasissiscuccimisencndacanesiteentanteieeasdadetents 1 Chapter 2 Using the Equipment Manager 2 2ccecceeececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseseeeseeeeaneneees 6 2 1 The Equipment Manager gue ebe EES 7 2 2 Configuration History Request and Report REENEN ENNEN EEN REENEN 8 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device s sssssssnunnnunnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnana 11 3 1 Using the Device taggt SEENEN 12 3 1 1 Introduction to the Device Manager sssssssssssssunrnsnrnnsnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnn 12 3 1 2 The Device Manager COMpoOnents cccceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeseaaeeeseaeeeeeees 12 3 1 3 COMMON Control EEGENEN 13 3 1 4 Working with Configuration
386. vice types In This Chapter Using the Device Manager on page 12 Introduction to Device Management on page 15 Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Equipment on page 17 Site Page on page 22 Connectivity on page 28 SNMP Managers Tab on page 48 Equipment on page 61 ASN GW on page 90 BS on page 125 Site Sector on page 158 Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager 3 1 Using the Device Manager Introduction to the Device Manager on page 12 The Device Manager Components on page 12 Oo Oo E Common Control Buttons on page 13 RW Working with Configuration Tables on page 13 3 1 1 Introduction to the Device Manager The Device Manager enables managing a single device and its components if applicable gt To open the Device Manager for a selected device In the Equipment Manager double click on the selected entity or select it and click on the Configure button or right click on it and select the Configure option in the pop up window The Device Manager for the selected entity opens displaying the main page for the device 3 1 2 The Device Manager Components M EDI on 10 10 141 156 Configuringequipment Title Bar e ei EL site Page Name Osn GB Connectivity eae General Sne Tab Selection Q ASN GW De Input Alarm o Ga Ste Sector Input Number Name Send Alarm Blocking j External Equ
387. xit the interface configuration mode npu config if exit f To view the VLAN mapping parameters run the command npu show interface gigabitethernet 0 10 vlan mapping 4 External Management Interface To configure the necessary parameters of the External Management interface used for connectivity with the EMS system and Local CRAFT Utility run the following commands a Enable the External Management interface configuration mode npu config interface external mgmt b Configure the IP address x x x x and subnet mask y y y y npu config if ip address x x x x y y y y c Exit the interface configuration mode npu config if exit 5 Apply Changes in Site Connectivity Configuration The system must be reset to apply the changes npu reset 6 Static Route Definition Static Route must be configured whenever the EMS server and the NPU are on different subnets Run the following command npu config ip route x x x x y y y y Z Z Z Z x x x x y y y y is the network segment of the EMS server z z z z is the next hop IP address that should be in the segment of the external management interface 7 SNMP and Trap Managers Definition To define the communities to be used by the SNMP manager run the command npu config snmp mgr ReadCommunity public ReadWriteCommunity private For proper operation of the manager you should configure also the Trap Manager parameters and enable sending traps to the defined Trap Manager a npu config trap
388. y or several selected entries from the Antennas List NOTE SE SC e An associated antenna specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer j to Site Sector lt gt Page on page 158 The Antennas Parameters Editor section includes the following parameters 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual e Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Antenna Product Type The antenna type The available options includes a list of default and standard antennas The default is default1 portV The Antenna Product Type of an associated Antenna cannot be modified Information Read only string indicating the characteristics of the Antenna according to the Antenna Product Type The string structure is lt type gt N PA E G F lt EDT Supported gt lt EDT Min gt lt EDT Max gt lt EDT Step gt lt Frequency Min gt lt Frequency Max gt where type part number or one of the default antennas N Number of Ports P Polarization per port Available options are V Vertical H Horizontal 45 45 2 ports DS 45 45 45 45 4 ports DS A Azymuth Beam Width in degrees E Elevation Beam Width in degrees G Gain in dBi F Front to Back Ratio in cB lt EDT Supported gt FALSE or TRUE lt EDT Min gt The lowest value in the EDT control range lt EDT Max gt The highest value in the EDT control range lt EDT Step gt The EDT control resolution lt Frequency Min
389. y this parameter is configurable in the ASN GW Bearer Interface page see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 55 If the value is other than the default 11 it will be indicated in the Backhaul VLAN Translation table 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D ei Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device 3 5 1 1 2 Cascade Port Connectivity The Cascade Port section includes the following parameters of the Cascade Ethernet port Parameter Description Operational State Read only The operational status of the Ethernet port Unlock Up or Lock Down Administrative State The administrative status of the port Unlock Up or Lock Down The default is Unlock Up Negotiation The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual The default is Auto Port Speed The port speed to be used for the physical interface The available options are 10 100 and 1000 Mbps Configurable only if Negotiation is set to Manual The default is 100 Mbps Duplex Mode The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Duplex The default is Full Duplex Configurable only if Negotiation is set to Manual and Port Speed is not set to 1000 If Port Speed is set to 1000 Duplex Mode is set to Full Duplex 3 5 1 1 3 Management Port The Management Port section includes the following of the Mana
390. y Ratus Defaut Authonticstor IP Address iaie E Active Mos 1024 a begacy ASN GW Mode Disable D GSM GW Pooks E aatom Primary Poot ASN GW Primary Pool ASN GW Secondary Pool IP Address Connectivy Status ThAddress Connectivity Status CT L t w Anc Dore ken Figure 3 53 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab The Bearer tab includes the following sections E Bearer Interface E ASN GW Load Balancing 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual D 3 8 3 1 1 3 8 3 1 2 4Motion and MC ASN GW DD User Manual Bearer Interface Chapter 3 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS Must be unique in the network All BS bearer interfaces of the unit should be in the same subnet together with the NPU s bearer interface in Distributed ASN GW Topology IP Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask of the bearer interface of the BS Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway of the bearer interface of the BS Must be in the same subnet with the BS bearer IP Address VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the bearer interface of the BS In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS it is not configurable and is equal to the NPU Bearer VLAN ID see L1 L2 Connectivity Page on page 28 Configurable only for Micro Outdoor BTS The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 11 Default Gateway Connectivity Status Read only The st

4Motion Device Driver User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents